Panasonic VDR-M50GC-S User Guide Manual
Transcription
Panasonic VDR-M50GC-S User Guide Manual
ORDER NO. VM0405024C8 DVD Video Camera/Recorder VDR-M70EG VDR-M70EB VDR-M70GC VDR-M50EG VDR-M50EB VDR-M50GC (M70) or “TYPE M70” and (M50) or “TYPE M50” in this manual stands for the model shown below. (M70) or “TYPE M70”: VDR-M70EG, EB, GC (M50) or “TYPE M50”: VDR-M50EG, EB, GC © 2004 Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. All rights reserved. Unauthorized copying and distribution is a violation of law. Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC CONTENTS Page 1 SAFTY PRECAUTION FOR REPAIR Page 3 1.1. INTRODUCTION 3 1.2. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 3 4.6. CHECKING VERSIONS OF FIRMWARE AND UPDATING 47 4.7. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS 1.3. PREVENTION OF ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) TO ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES VDR-M70/M50 4 58 6 5.1. ITEM TO BE CHECKED 63 7 5.2. ORDER OF DISASSEMBLY 63 7 5.3. DISASSEMBLY 65 1.5. CAUTION FOR AC CORD (EB ONLY) 2.2. SPECIFICATIONS 57 63 5 2.1. OVERVIEW 4.9. SPECIAL FUNCTIONS 5 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY 1.4. CAUTION FOR REPLACING THE LITHIUM BATTERY 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 50 4.8. PROCEDURE FOR REMOVING DISC FROM FAULTY 6 ADJUSTMENT 8 80 2.3. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM PREVIOUS MODELS 11 6.1. CREATING REFERENCE DATA 80 2.4. COMPATIBILITY OF RECORDED DISCS 13 6.2. SETUPS FOR ADJUSTMENT 90 2.5. NAME OF PARTS 14 6.3. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS 97 2.6. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS FOR DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDERS 3 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION 6.4. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE 101 18 7 SCHEMATIC, CIRCUIT BOARD AND BLOCK DIAGRAMS 125 20 8 EXPLODED VIEWS 155 20 8.1. MAIN SECTION 155 21 8.2. LCD BLOCK SECTION 157 21 8.3. CAMERA LENS SECTION 158 8.4. EVF BLOCK SECTION 159 FUNCTIONS 22 8.5. PACKING PARTS & ACCESSORIES SECTION 160 4.3. PROBLEM GUIDE 25 4.4. MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING 32 3.1. DESCRIPTION OF STRUCTURE 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 4.1. PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLESHOOTING 4.2. SYSTEM RESETTING/RESETTING CAMERA 9 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST 4.5. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION AND TROUBLESHOOTING 2 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 9.1. MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST 161 9.2. ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST 163 10 FACTORY SETTING 42 161 169 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1 SAFTY PRECAUTION FOR REPAIR 1.1. INTRODUCTION 1.1.1. INTRODUCTION This service manual contains technical information which will allow service personnel´s to understand and service this model.Please place orders using the parts list and not the drawing reference numbers. If the circuit is changed or modified, this information will be followed by supplement service manual to be filed with original service manual. 1.1.2. ABOUT LEAD FREE SOLDER (PbF) Distinction of PbF PCB: PCBs (manufactured) using lead free solder will have a PdF stamp on the PCB. Caution: · Pb free solder has a higher melting point than standard solder, Typically the melting point is 50-70°F (30-40°C) higher. Please use a high temperature soldering iron. In case of soldering iron with temperature control, please set it to 700±20°F (370±10°C). · Pb free solder will tend to splash when heated too high (about 1100°F/ 600°C). When soldering or unsoldering, please completely remove all of the solder on the pins or solder area, and be sure to heat the soldering points with the Pb free solder until it melts enough. 1.2. 1.2.1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS return path to thechassis, the reading should be between 1MΩ and 5.2MΩ. When the exposed metal does not have a return path to the chassis, the reading must be infinity. GENERAL GUIDELINES 1. IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE There are special components used in this equipment which are important for safety. These parts are marked by in the Schematic Diagrams, Circuit Board Layout, Exploded Views and Replacement Parts List.It is essential that these critical parts should be replaced with manufacturer’s specified parts to prevent X-RADIATION, shock fire, or other hazards. Do not modify the original design without permission of manufacturer. 1.2.3. 1. Plug the AC cord directly into the AC outlet. Do not use an isolation transformer for this check. 2. Connect a 1.5 kΩ, 10 W resistor, in parallel with a 0.15 µF capacitor, between each exposed metallic part on the set and a good earth ground, as shown in Figure. 1 2. An Isolation Transformer should always be used during the servicing of AC Adaptor whose chassis is not isolated from the AC power line. Use a transformer of adequate power rating as this protects the technician from accidents resulting in personalinjury from electrical shocks. It will also protect AC Adaptor from being damaged by accidental shorting that may occur during servicing. 3. Use an AC voltmeter, with 1 kΩ/V or more sensitivity, to measure the potential across the resistor. 4. Check each exposed metallic part, and measure the voltage at each point. 5. Reverse the AC plug in the AC outlet and repeat each of the above measurements. 3. When servicing, observe the original lead dress. It a short circuit is found, replace all parts which have been overheated or damaged by the short circuit. 6. The potential at any point should not exceed 0.75 V RMS. A leakage current tester (Simpson Model 229 or equivalent) may be used to make the hot checks, leakage current must not exceed 1/2 mA. In case a measurement is outside of the limits specified, there is a possibility of a shock hazard, andthe equipment should be repaired and rechecked before it is returned to the customer. 4. After servicing, see to it that all the protective devices such as insulation barriers, insulation papers shields are properly installed. 5. After servicing, make the following leakage current checks to prevent the customer from being exposed to shock hazards. 1.2.2. LEAKAGE CURRENT HOT CHECK (See Figure. 1 ) LEAKAGE CURRENT COLD CHECK 1. Unplug the AC cord and connect a jumper between the two prongs on the plug. 2. Measure the resistance value, with an ohmmeter, between the jumpered AC plug and each exposed metallic cabinet part on the equipment such as screwheads, connectors, control shafts, etc. When the exposed metallic part has a Figure. 1 3 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1.3. PREVENTION OF ELECTRO STATIC DISCHARGE (ESD) TO ELECTROSTATICALLY SENSITIVE (ES) DEVICES Some semiconductor (solid state) devices can be damaged easily by static electricity. Such components commonly are called Electrostatically Sensitive (ES) Devices. Examples of typical ES devices are integrated circuits and some field-effect transistorsand semiconductor “chip” components. The following techniques should be used to help reduce the incidence of component damage caused by electro static discharge (ESD). 1. Immediately before handling any semiconductor component or semiconductor-equipped assembly, drain off any ESD on your body by touching a known earth ground. Alternatively, obtain and wear a commercially available discharging ESD wrist strap, whichshould be removed for potential shock reasons prior to applying power to the unit under test. 2. After removing an electrical assembly equipped with ES devices, place the assembly on a conductive surface such as aluminum foil, to prevent electrostatic charge buildup or exposure of the assembly. 3. Use only a grounded-tip soldering iron to solder or unsolder ES devices. 4. Use only an antistatic solder removal device. Some solder removal devices not classified as “antistatic (ESD protected)” can generate electrical charge sufficient to damage ES devices. 5. Do not use freon-propelled chemicals. These can generate electrical charges sufficient to damage ES devices. 6. Do not remove a replacement ES device from its protective package until immediately before you are ready to install it. (Most replacement ES devices are packaged with leads electrically shorted together by conductive foam, aluminum foil or comparableconductive material). 7. Immediately before removing the protective material from the leads of a replacement ES device, touch the protective material to the chassis or circuit assembly into which the device will be installed. CAUTION: Be sure no power is applied to the chassis or circuit, and observe all other safety precautions. 8. Minimize bodily motions when handling unpackaged replacement ES devices. (Otherwise harmless motion such as the brushing together of your clothes fabric or the lifting of your foot from a carpeted floor can generate static electricity (ESD)sufficient to damage an ES device). 4 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1.4. CAUTION FOR REPLACING THE LITHIUM BATTERY CAUTION: 1. Be sure to discharge the capacitor on FRONT C.B.A. before disassembling the Front C.B.A. 2. Be careful of the high voltage circuit on Front C.B.A. when servicing. 1.4.1. REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE 5 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1.5. CAUTION FOR AC CORD (EB ONLY) 1.5.1. As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this appliance may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: INFORMATION FOR YOUR SAFETY IMPORTANT Your attention is drawn to the fact that recording of prerecorded tapes or discs or other published or broadcast material may infringe copyright laws. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. WARNING To reduce the risk of fire or shock hazard, do not expose this equipment to rain or moisture. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. CAUTION To reduce the risk of fire or shock hazard and annoying interference, use the recommended accessories only. FOR YOUR SAFETY Under no circumstances should either of these wires be connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug, marked with the letter E or the Earth Symbol. DO NOT REMOVE THE OUTER COVER To prevent electric shock, do not remove the cover. No user serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to qualified service personnel. 1.5.2. CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD 1.5.2.2. Before use For your safety, please read the following text carefully. remove the Connector Cover as follows. This appliance is supplied with a moulded three-pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A 5-ampere fuse is fitted in this plug. Should the fuse need to be replaced please ensure that the replacement fuse has a rating of 5 amperes and it is approved by ASTA or BSI to BS1362 Check for the ASRA mark or the BSI mark on the body of the fuse. 1.5.2.3. CAUTION FOR AC MAINS LEAD 1. Remove the Fuse Cover with a screwdriver. If the plug contains a removable fuse cover you must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is replaced. If you lose the fuse cover, the plug must not be used until a replacement cover is obtained. A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from your local Panasonic Dealer. If the fitted moulded plug is unsuitable for the socket outlet in your home then the fuse should be removed and the plug cut off and disposed of safety. 2. Replace the fuse and attach the Fuse cover. There is a danger of severe electrical shock if the cut off plug is inserted into any 13-ampere socket. If a new plug is to be fitted please observe the wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt, please consult a qualified electrician. 1.5.2.1. Important The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: Blue Brown Neutral Live 6 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION 2.1. OVERVIEW The VDR-M70 has a CCD image sensor with a total of 1,020,000 pixels and a high-performance optical 10-power zoom. The VDR-M50 has a CCD image sensor with a total of 800,000 pixels and an optical 18-power zoom. The VDR-M50 has been made compact than the VDR-M30. 2.1.1. Servicing method Refer to the following table and perform the designated, appropriate servicing. Do not perform any servicing other than that described in this manual. Parts Name Disc drive unit Lens unit AEL-H/AEL circuit board(*1) DRF-H/DRF circuit board(*1)(*2) FRT-H/FRT circuit board(*1) GYR-H/GYR circuit board(*1) LCD circuit board MAN-H/MAN circuit board(*1) MR circuit board(*3) SAF-H/SAF circuit board(*1)(*4) SEN-H circuit board Servicing method DISC DRIVE FRT-H/FRT UNIT CIRCUIT BOARD MR CIRCUIT BOARD (In the LCD unit) Unit replacement. Which incorporates the DRV-R, MOD and HDM circuit boards. Unit replacement. Component replacement. Component replacement. Component replacement. GYR-H/GYR CIRCUIT SEN-H BOARD SHE-H/SHE CIRCUIT LENS CIRCUIT BOARD UNIT BOARD Component replacement. Component replacement. Circuit board assembly replacement. Component replacement. Component replacement. LCD CIRCUIT BOARD DRF-H/DRF CIRCUIT BOARD MAN-H/MAN CIRCUIT BOARD SAF-H/SAF CIRCUIT BOARD Component replacement. (*1)(*5) SHE-H/SHE circuit board(*1) SWL2 circuit board SWL3 circuit board USB/USB-H circuit board(*1) *1: *2: *3: *4: *5: AEL-H/AEL CIRCUIT USB-H/USB BOARD CIRCUIT BOARD Component replacement. Component replacement. Component replacement. Component replacement. SWL2 CIRCUIT BOARD Fig. 2-1-1 The board names suffixed with “-H” are for VDR-M70 only. Film type board that connects MAN-H/MAN circuit board and disc drive unit. Film type board in LCD unit Film type board that connects AEL-H/AEL circuit board and SWL2 circuit board. Applicable only to VDR-M70. Although the SEN-H circuit board and lens unit in VDR-M70 are assigned as different boards, the circuit board in VDR-M50 that corresponds to SEN-H is assembled in the lens unit. 7 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 2.2. SPECIFICATIONS Item CCD Image Sensor Specifications VDR-M70 VDR-M50 1/4-inch interlaced 1/6-inch interlaced Total number of pixels VDR-M70 VDR-M50 Approx. 1,020,000 Approx. 800,000 Number of effective pixels: VDR-M70 Video: Approx. 570,000 Photo: Approx. 960,000 Video: Approx. 410,000 Photo: Approx. 410,000 F1.8 - 2.4, f = 3/16” - 1-1/2” (3.8 - 38 mm) F1.8 - 3.6, f = 1/16” - 1-1/2” (2.1 - 37.8 mm) 1-7/16” (37 mm) / 0.75mm Auto/Manual Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom added (40× for photo) Optical 18×, 500× with digital zoom added (40× for photo) 3 lx (When Low Light mode is selected) 0.33-inch color TFT (approx. 110,000 pixels) 2.5-inch color TFT (approx. 120,000 pixels) Electronic Type 1/60 - 1/4000 second (video) Still recording only Ø 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack (a plug-in power type microphone cannot be used) Movie (with sound) Still (with DVD-RAM disc, SD memory card, MultiMediaCard) XTRA mode: Approx. 18 min. FINE mode: Approx. 30 min. STD mode: Approx. 60 min. FINE mode: Approx. 30 min. STD mode: Approx. 60 min. VDR-M50 Lens VDR-M70 VDR-M50 Filter diameter / Thread pitch: Focus Zoom VDR-M70 VDR-M50 Required minimum illumination Viewfinder LCD monitor Image Stabilizer Shutter speed Self-timer recording External microphone jack Recording mode Maximum recordable time (Per side) DVD-RAM disc (per side) DVD-R disc (per side) 8 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Item Maximum number of recordable stills Recording format Specifications DVD-RAM disc (per side) SD memory Card (When using 32MB card) DVD-RAM disc VDR-M70 VDR-M50 DVD-R disc Card Audio playback format Recording media Jacks Battery system VDR-M70 Power consumption (when recording with LCD monitor off ) VDR-M50 Dimensions (W × H × D, excluding projections) Operating temperature (humidity) Storage temperature Weight (without battery and disc) Total weight when recording (when using CGA-DU14E battery) VDR-M70 VDR-M50 VDR-M70 VDR-M50 999 However, if video and photo are mixed on one disc, the recordable number will decrease Approx. 50 (in FINE mode) Varies depending on the recording quality and the type of card Approx. 220 (in FINE mode) Varies depending on the recording quality and the type of card Movie: Conforming to DVD video recording (DVD-VR) format Audio: MPEG Audio layer 2 Still: Simultaneous recording, conforming to JPEG format (VDR-M70: 1280 × 960 pixels, VDRM50: 640 × 480 pixels) and DVD video recording (DVD-VR) format (704 × 480 pixels). [JPEG of external input: 640 × 480 pixels] Movie: Conforming to DVD video format Audio: MPEG Audio layer 2 Still: Conforming to JPEG (VDR-M70: 1280 × 960 pixels, VDR-M50PP: 640 × 480 pixels) format [External input: 640 × 480 pixels] MPEG Audio layer 2, Dolby AC3 8 cm DVD-RAM disc (conforming to DVD-RAM Ver. 2.1) 8 cm DVD-R disc (conforming to DVD-R for General Ver. 2.0) SD memory card MultiMediaCard Video/audio input *1 /output × 1 External microphone input × 1 USB terminal (connected to PC USB port) × 1 Lithium-ion Approx. 4.4 W (DVD-RAM disc used, FINE mode) Approx. 4.1 W (DVD-RAM disc used, FINE mode) Approx. 64 × 89 × 146 mm 0-40°C (less than 80%) 0-30°C when connected to PC -20 - 60°C Approx. 500 g Approx. 490 g Approx. 585 g Approx. 575 g 9 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Item Specifications Provided accessories AC adapter/charger (VSK0631(EB/EG),VSK0631-A(GC)) Power cable DC power cord, Battery (model CGA-DU14E) AV/S input *1/output cable Infrared remote control (model VEQ3993) Lithium battery for remote control (model CR2025) Lens cap Lens cap string Shoulder belt Software CD-ROM PC connection cable 8cm DVD-RAM disc (in round DVD holder) *1: The line input function is provided in the following models: VDR-M70GC VDR-M50GC Specifications are subject to change without notice for the purpose of improvement. Specifications of VSK0631/0631-A AC Adapter/Charger Power supply Input capacity DC output (max.) Charge output Weight External dimensions (W x H x D) Ambient temperature for operation Allowable relative humidity 100 - 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz 26 VA (at 100 V) 7.9 V, 1.4 A 8.4 V, 0.65A 105 g 61 × 32 × 91 mm 5 - 35°C 40 - 80% 10 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 2.3. MAJOR DIFFERENCES FROM PREVIOUS MODELS : Same as on left Item CCD VDR-M70/M50 VDR-M70: 1/3.8-inch interlaced VDR-M50: 1/6-inch interlaced Total number VDR-M70: Approx. 1,020,000 pixels of pixels VDR-M50: Approx. 800,000 pixels Number of VDR-M70: Video: Approx. 570,000 pixels effective pixels Photo: Approx. 960,000 pixels Lens Zoom Filter diameter Required minimum illumination Viewfinder LCD monitor Power consumption Weight Accessory Shoe PC connection terminal [USB standard] VDR-M50: Video: Approx. 410,000 Photo: Approx. 410,000 VDR-M70: F1.8 - 2.4 f = 3.8 - 38 mm VDR-M50: F1.8 - 2.8 f = 2.1 - 37.8 mm VDR-M70: Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom added (40× for photo) VDR-M50: Optical 18×, 500× with digital zoom added (40× for photo) 37 mm 3 lx (When Low Light mode is selected) 0.33-inch color TFT (approx. 110,000 pixels) 2.5-inch color TFT (approx. 120,000 pixels) VDR-M70: Approx. 4.4 W VDR-M50: Approx. 4.1 W VDR-M70: Approx. 500 g VDR-M50: Approx. 490 g VDR-M70: Power/Control terminal provided VDR-M50: Power/Control terminal not provided Type mini-B [USB 2.0] HS mode 11 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M30 1/4-inch interlaced F1.8 - 2.5 3.15 - 31.5 mm Optical 10×, 240× with digital zoom added (40× for photo) 30.5 mm 0.44-inch color TFT (approx. 110,000 pixels) Approx. 4.7 W Approx. 480 g Type mini-B [USB 2.0] FS mode VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Item Dimensions (W × H × D) and shape VDR-M70/M50 VDR-M50: Approx. 64 × 89 × 146 mm AC adapter/charger Battery pack Infrared remote control AV input/output jack Shape of DVD holder VDR-M30 VDR-M70: Approx. 64 × 89 × 146 mm VSK0631(EG/EB), VSK0631-A(GC) Provided: CGS-DU14E (7.2V/1360mA) Optional: CGS-DU14E (7.2V/1360mA) VEQ3993 Pin 8 type Approx. 57 × 89 × 132 mm Pin 10 type Round DVD holder PC editing kit Disc protect EIS function Line input function Number of pixels for video (MPEG2) Number of pixels for JPEG photo during camera recording Provided Software disc-protect VDR-M70: Video mode only VDR-M50: Video and photo mode Varies depending on the model (destination) *1 XTRA/FINE: 704 × 480 pixels STD: 352 × 480 pixels VDR-M70: 1280 × 960 pixels VDR-M50: 680 × 480 pixels 12 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Video mode only Not provided VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Item Number of pixels for MPEG photo during camera recording (When using disc) Number of pixels for photo during line-input recording File size of photo 2.4. VDR-M70/M50 VDR-M30 704 × 480 pixels JPEG: 640 × 480 pixels MPEG: 704 × 480 pixels VDR-M70: FINE: Approx. 512KB NORM: Approx. 384KB ECO: Approx. 256KB VDR-M50: FINE: Approx. 128KB NORM: Approx. 64KB ECO: Approx. 32KB COMPATIBILITY OF RECORDED DISCS Discs recorded or edited on VDR-M70/M50 can also be recorded, edited and played back on other DVD video camera/recorders, except for those for which disc-protect(*1) has been set. Discs recorded or edited on other DVD video camera/recorders can also be recorded, edited and played back on VDR-M70/M50. *1: The VDR-M30 can release the disc-protect that has been set on VDR-M70/M50. Therefore, if the disc-protect set on VDR-M70/M50 is released, the discs can be recorded, edited and played back on VDR-M30. 13 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 2.5. NAME OF PARTS 14 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 15 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 16 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 17 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 2.6. LIST OF ABBREVIATIONS AND TERMS FOR DVD VIDEO CAMERA/RECORDERS Index Abbreviation/Term A C AC3 CPRM D DCF Dolby AC3 DPOF DVD DVD Forum DVD-Audio DVD-R DVD-RAM DVD-ROM DVD-RW DVD-Video E DVD Video Format DVD Video Recording Format Exif F I FireWire IEEE1394 Interlaced CCD J i-LINK JEIDA JEITA JPEG L LCD LPCM M MMC MMCA Explanation See Dolby AC3. Content Protection for Recordable Media: Copyright protection function that is suitable for online distribution of music. Design rule for Camera File system standard: This camera file system standard, established by JEIDA (now merged to JEITA). Audio coding format developed by Dolby Laboratories in U.S, also simply referred as AC3 format: Supports 5-channel full-range sound and one channel for sub-woofer sound playback. Digital Print Order Format: DPOF allows user to record print information along with photos on storage media to facilitate printing of photos. Digital Versatile Disc. A huge amount of digital data for video (movie) and audio can be recorded on this disc, whose size is the same as CD. International organization that formulates the technical standards of DVD One type of DVD standard disc, on which high-quality audio can be recorded One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing once is possible (recordable type) One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing up to 100,000 times is possible One type of DVD standard disc, to which data for computer can be recorded One type of DVD standard disc, to which writing up to 1000 times is possible One type of DVD standard disc, on which high-quality video and audio can be recorded Video recording/playback standard that applies to DVD-Video, DVD-R and DVDRW Video recording/playback standard that applies to DVD-RAM and DVD-RW: This allows versatile editing functions, differing from the DVD Video Format. Exchangeable image file format. File format used for recording photos on digital cameras, established by JEIDA (now merged to JEITA). See IEEE1394. Also referred to as FireWire or i-LINK: Standard for serial interface that connects PC and peripheral devices This CCD scans one image twice (scans roughly once and interpolates between first scanning lines the second time) and interlaces the images obtained by scanning twice to create a one-image signal. See IEEE1394. JEIDA stands for Japan Electronic Industry Development Association. JEITA stands for Japan Electronics and Information Technology Industries Association, which came into existence when JEIDA merged with EIAJ (Electronic Industries Association of Japan). JEITA has established Exif and DCF standard. Joint Photographic Expert Group: International standard format for compressing still images Liquid Crystal Display. LCD formats include STN and TFT. Linear Pulse Code Modulation. Also referred to as linear PCM. LPCM is a format that digitizes analog audio data during recording and converts it to analog data during playback. See MultiMediaCard. See MultiMediaCard Association. 18 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Index Abbreviation/Term M MPEG MPEG Audio Layer 2 MultiMediaCard O MultiMediaCard Association OSTA S SCSI SDA SD Card Association SDMI SD Memory Card SecureMMC Secure MultiMediaCard Software discProtect STN LCD T TFT LCD U UDF USB V VBR Explanation Motion Picture Experts Group: Standard related to compression of digital video and audio. MPEG2 is a higher standard of MPEG and is applied to video (movie) requiring higher quality. One of three audio compression standards (layers 1-3) defined by MPEG Also referred to as MMC. Compact memory card, 32 mm long × 24 mm wide × 1.4 mm thick Also referred to as MMCA. This association promotes the widespread use of multimedia cards. Optical Storage Technology Association, which is an international industry organization that promotes recordable optical storage used to store computer data and images. Small Computer System Interface: A standard for connecting computer and peripheral devices. Frequently notated by prefixing or suffixing the number that indicates the data transfer rate, and First, Ultra, Wide, etc., to SCSI. See SD Card Association. Also referred to as SDA. This organization promotes the popularization of SD memory card. Secure Digital Music Initiative: This conference was established by hardware makers, the Recording Industry Association of America (RIAA) and music industry companies, to protect copyrights of musical compositions. Formally named Secure Digital Memory Card. This compact memory card, 32 mm long × 24 mm wide × 2.1 mm thick, is equipped with an advanced copyright protection function. See Secure MultiMediaCard. Also referred to as SecureMMC. This compact memory card has multimedia card specifications, to which an advanced copyright protection function is added. Unusable on the DVD video camera/recorder. This function writes the protect information to DVD-RAM disc to prevent accidental erasure. Software Disc-Protect is included in DVD-RAM disc specifications defined by DVD Forum. Super-Twisted Nematic Liquid Crystal Display: This type of color LCD is inferior to TFT LCD in coloring, view angle, etc. Thin Film Transistor Liquid Crystal Display: This type of color LCD features clear display, high contrast, wide view angle, etc. Universal Disc Format, which is a file format of recordable disc defined by OSTA. The version 2.01 UDF is used on DVD video camera/recorder. Universal Serial Bus: Standard of serial interface that connects PC and peripheral devices. Two versions - USB1.1 and USB2.0, with different data transfer rates exist at present. Stands for Variable Bit Rate: This format of coding audio and video varies the amount of data depending on the subject image. 19 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 3 DESCRIPTION OF OPERATION 3.1. DESCRIPTION OF STRUCTURE (1) Differences in structure between VDR-M70 and VDR-M50 There are two major differences in structure between VDR-M70 and VDR-M50: 1) Accessory shoe The accessory shoe on VDR-M70 has a power/control terminal, but the accessory shoe on VDR-M50 doesn’t. 2) Lens unit The lens unit in VDR-M50 includes the cushion, crystal filter, CCD image sensor and SEN circuit board, which are discrete from the lens unit in VDR-M70. CCD IMAGE SENSOR SEN-H CIRCUIT BOARD LENS UNIT LENS UNIT Circuit board equivalent to SEN CUSHION CRYSTAL FILTER VDR-M70 LENS UNIT VDR-M50 LENS UNIT Fig. 3-1-2 20 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4 TROUBLESHOOTING 4.1. PROCEDURE FOR TROUBLESHOOTING Perform troubleshooting in the order shown in Fig. 4-1-1. No improvement Check phenomenon System reset (section 4-2) No message or error code appears*1 Problem guide (section 4-3) Updating unneeded Check firmware version (section 4-6-1) Trouble Diagnosis (section 4-7) Updating needed : Phenomenon Message appears*1 Messages and Troubleshooting (section 4-4) Update firmware (section 4-6-2) : Troubleshooting : Check Error code appears*1 No improvement after updating Major Error Codes and Troubleshooting (section 4-5-3) *1: Messages and error codes will appear on LCD monitor or in viewfinder. Fig. 4-1-1 Note: 1) Before troubleshooting or servicing, be sure to obtain customer approval for the following: 4.2.1 List of items to be reset a) The image data stored on disc may be lost depending on the details and situation of fault (defect). b) The date/time and various settings, including video recording mode, designated by customer after purchase may in some cases be reset to the defaults before purchase (factory settings). 2) Take note of settings on received product, referring to “4-2 System Resetting/Resetting Camera Functions”: The notes will be necessary not only for resetting, but for checking defects that occur under the particular setting conditions. 21 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.2. SYSTEM RESETTING/RESETTING CAMERA FUNCTIONS The VDR-M70/M50 has two types of reset function: “System reset” and “Resetting camera functions”. The reset operation will return the various settings to the defaults when the VDR-M70/M50 was shipped form factory. Information: If a defect occurs in product, take note of settings, and then execute system reset first: The defect may disappear. 4.2.1. List of items to be reset Table 4-2-1 shows the items that will be reset to defaults at the factory by the two types of reset operation: “system reset” and “resetting camera functions”. Use the memo column provided in the table to enter the settings of any received device. (1) Procedure for checking settings 1) Use a battery or the AC adapter/charger to power the VDR-M70/M50. 2) Insert a DVD-RAM disc, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO”. For subsequent steps, operate the VDR-M70/M50 while viewing the LCD monitor or viewfinder. 3) Press the MENU button to display the camera function setup menu screen: Make sure of the settings. 4) Operate the joystick to display the menu screens for record function setup, date function setup, LCD monitor setup and initial setup in sequence, making sure of the settings. At this time, the items on photo quality, external photo input and self-timer will not appear, since they are related to photo recording: Check them in steps 6) and 7). 5) Set the power switch to “[CARD]PHOTO”. It is not necessary to insert a card at this time. 6) Press the MENU button to display the camera function setup menu screen, and then operate the joystick to display the record function setup menu screen in order to check the settings on photo quality, external photo input and self-timer. 7) After checking is complete, press the MENU button to restore the ordinary screen. 22 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Table 4-2-1 List of items to be reset Item Camera System function reset reset Default at factory Setting range Yes: Will be reset No: Will not be reset Remarks Camera Functions Setup Program AE Yes Yes Auto Auto, Sports, Portrait, Spotlight, Sand & Snow, Low Light White Bal. Yes Yes Auto EIS Yes Yes On Auto, Set, Outdoor, Indoor1, Indoor2 On, Off Dig. Zoom Wind Cut Cinema Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 40× Off Off 240×, 40×, Off On, Off On, Off Low Light will not appear when “VIDEO mode: STD” is specified. Displayed on VDRM70PP only in the Video mode Displayed only in the Video mode Record Functions Setup VIDEO Mode Yes Yes FINE Quality Yes Yes FINE Input Source Yes Yes CAMERA PHOTO Input Self Timer OSD Output Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Field Off On With DVD-RAM disc: XTRA, FINE, STD With DVD-R disc: FINE, STD FINE, NORM, ECO Displayed only in the card photo mode CAMERA, LINE, S LINE Diaplayed only on models that have the line input function (*1) Frame, Field On, Off On, Off Displayed only when “Input Source: CAMERA” is specified Date Setup Date Mode Yes Yes M/D/Y Date Set Yes No 1/1/2004 12:00AM Brightness Color Level Yes Yes Yes Yes Center Center Beep Power Save Record LED Language Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes On Off On English PM5:00 Y/M/D, 5:00PM M/D/Y, 17:00 D/M/Y ----------------- LCD Setup + + Initial Setup On, Off On, Off On, Off English, French, Spanish, German, Italian *1: The line input function is provided in the following models: VDR-M70GC VDR-M50GC 23 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Displayed only in the Video mode Memo VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.2.2. System reset procedure 1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and then disconnect the battery or AC adapter/ charger. 2) Use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the RESET button for approx. 2 seconds. RESET Fig. 4-2-1 4.2.3. Procedure for resetting camera functions 1) Connect the battery or AC adapter/charger to power the VDR-M70/M50. 2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and place the VDR-M70/M50 in the recording pause status; loading disc is not necessary at this time. For the following steps, operate VDR-M70/ M50 while viewing the LCD monitor or viewfinder. 3) Set the quick mode switch to “OFF”. 4) Press the MENU button to display the camera setting menu screen. 5) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick. 6) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying reset will appear. 7) Use the joystick to choose “YES”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be executed. 8) After reset, press the MENU button to close the camera setting menu. 24 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.3. PROBLEM GUIDE Check the following before judging that VDR-M70/M50 is faulty. Symptom Cause and Correction Power supplies Battery cannot be charged. Is the DC power cord connected to AC adapter/charger? Unplug it. If the DC power cord is connected, the AC adapter/charger will not enter the charge status. Is the battery abnormally hot? Remove the battery from AC adapter/charger, leave it as is until it cools down, and then charge it again. Has the battery been unused for a long time? Remove the battery from AC adapter/charger, and then reattach it. If the battery is still not charged, it may be dead: Purchase a new one. * If the battery does not charge after you try the above four procedures, it may be dead: Purchase a new battery. Battery weakens fast. Is the ambient temperature is too low or high? Always charge the battery at 50 - 86°F (10 - 30°C.) Are you using the VDR-M70/M50 where the temperature is low? A fully charged battery may be discharged sooner than usual at low temperatures. Keep extra batteries on hand. Battery may be dead: Replace with a new one. The performance of battery will deteriorate if it is used for an extended period of time or frequently. The CHARGE indicator on Is the ambient temperature is too low or high? Always charge the battery at 50 - 86°F (10 - 30°C.) AC adapter/charger is The battery may be over-discharged. blinking. Continue charging: The CHARGE indicator will change to a steady light, and the battery will be charged normally. Power turns off immediately Is battery charged? after being turned on. Charge it. Power goes off unexpectedly. Is Power Save specified "On"? The specifications state that the powered VDR-M70/M50 automatically turns off if it is left for as long as 5 minutes without performing recording or playback, with "Power Save: On" specified. Set the power switch to "POWER OFF", and then turn VDR-M70/M50 on again. To stop automatic power off, specify "Power Save: Off". Power cannot be turned off. Execute system reset (disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger, and then use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the RESET button for several seconds). Then connect a battery or AC adapter/charger and make sure the VDR-M70/ M50 accepts operation. System reset will return the date/time and all items set using menu (except for LCD settings) to the defaults at the factory. After recovery, reset the date/time and each setting item as required. 25 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Pressing the REC button will not start recording. Recording starts but stops immediately. Cause and Correction During recording Is input image copy-guarded? The specifications state that VDR-M70/M50 cannot record a copy-guarded image. Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to Disc cleaning method: disc, or is disc scratched? Use soft cloth to clean from inner to outer Clean the disc. If there is still no circumference in improvement, replace the disc. axial direction. [Never use solvent.] Is some other AV device directly connected to the AV input/output jack of VDRM70/M50? If the AV device is connected via several other devices, such as AV selector, the video signal may not be transmitted correctly. In such a case, reduce the number of devices through which the video signal is transmitted, or connect AV device directly. Are you attempting to record image from video game or PC? Depending on video game or PC, image cannot be recorded on VDR-M70/M50. Power switch does not change to PHOTO (disc). LCD screen is hard to see. Black dots or red, blue or green dots always lit appear on LCD screen or in Viewfinder. Focus is not correct. Is the LOCK switch beside the power switch set to the left? Switch it to the right to release the lock. Has brightness of LCD screen been adjusted? Stop recording and adjust the brightness. Is VDR-M70/M50 being used outdoors? Use the viewfinder. When using LCD monitor, adjust angle so that LCD screen is not exposed to direct sunlight. The panels used for LCD monitor and viewfinder of VDR-M70/M50 are produced using highly precise technology. However, 0.01% or less of total pixels may not light (black dots) or may remain lit (red, blue, green dots). (The effective amount of pixels on LCD panel is 99.99% or more.) This shows the limitations of the current technology, and does not indicate a fault that will interfere with the operation of LCD panel or operation of VDR-M70/M50. Is it difficult to use auto-focus with the subject? Focus manually. Does "MF" appear? The VDR-M70/M50 is set to manual focus. Focus the subject manually, or release manual focus. Is the diopter control of viewfinder correctly adjusted? Adjust the diopter control. In cases other than the above, set the power switch to "POWER OFF", and then reset it to a position other then “POWER OFF”. 26 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Cause and Correction During playback Recognition of disc is not complete. Pressing the playback button will not start playback. Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to disc, or is disc scratched? Clean the disc. Was the image recorded on a device other than VDR-M70/M50? Playback of image recorded on devices other than VDR-M70/M50 may be impossible. Has scene been edited on a device other than VDR-M70/M50? If a scene that was recorded on VDR-M70/M50 is edited on a device other than VDR-M70/M50, playback may not be possible on VDR-M70/M50. No playback image appears on TV screen. Is TV input selector set correctly? If the TV has multiple video input jacks, check to see whether the correct input jack was selected. If VDR-M70/M50 is connected to VCR, set the input selector of VCR to "external input (LINE)". Is VDR-M70/M50 connected to TV correctly? Check the connections. Does dirt or fingerprint adhere to disc, or is disc scratched? Clean the disc. Was the image input from analog VCR (VHS, 8 mm) and recorded? The problem may be improved if a VCR equipped with TBC (time base corrector) circuit is used for playback. Was recording of external input made with "Frame" specified? Specify "Field" for "PHOTO Input" in record mode settings. Is the TV volume control set correctly? Adjust volume control on TV. Did the image recorded from AV input/output jack have noise or disturbance? Re-record image with no noise or disturbance. Is a photo recorded on devices other than VDR-M70/M50 being played back? The VDR-M70/M50 specifications allow it to play back photos that are recorded conforming to DCF standard and have 80-4000 horizontal pixels x 603000 vertical pixels. Make sure that the photo to be played back satisfies these specifications. Note that even photos that satisfy the specifications may not be playable, depending on the recording status. The thumbnail of any photo that cannot be played back will appear in single blue. Is a photo with a large number of pixels being played back? It will take some time to play back a photo with a large number of pixels. Playback picture is momentarily interrupted. Poor playback picture. Playback picture is greatly distorted. No sound. Disc Navigation thumbnails do not appear. Photos on card cannot be played back. It will take some time to play back photos on card. 27 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Cause and Correction When connected to PC (when using provided software) No drive icon appears on PC. Is VDR-M70/M50 turned on? Connect the AC adapter/charger and set the power switch to a position other than "POWER OFF". Is PC connection cable properly plugged in? Plug the PC connection cable connector completely into VDR-M70/M50. Turn PC off and unplug the PC connection cable: Then restart PC and use the PC connection cable to connect the VDR-M70/M50 and PC. The USB device driver installed in PC is not properly recognized. Restart PC. If the drive icon still does not appear, use "Refresh driver" in Device Manager to reinstall the USB device driver. If a yellow "!" mark is attached to some device in Windows Device Manager, uninstall the USB device driver, and then reinstall it. It is recommended that you install Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 or later. A fatal exception 0A error occurs while installing USB driver in Windows 2000 Professional Application is not normally Turn the PC and VDR-M70/M50 off, and try again. run on PC. DISC EJECT button does The DISC EJECT button is invalid while VDR-M70/M50 is connected to PC. not work when VDR-M70/ Start Windows Explorer, right-click the drive icon corresponding to M50 is connected to PC. VDR-M70/M50, and then click "Eject". Disc cannot be ejected even by operating Windows Explorer or applications. When the time stamp of file on DVD-RAM disc is viewed on PC, it is different from the actual recording date/ time. Error occurs in playback of VDR-M70/M50 on PC Error occurs during writing to DVD-R disc. Transfer of images stops. Was DVD-MovieAlbbumSE (software provided with VDR-M70/M50) started? Terminate DVD-MovieAlbbumSE. Since the file system of VDR-M70/M50 is operated on Greenwich Mean Time (GMT), the time stamp will be GMT. However, since the time lag information is recorded on disc, date/time display on VDR-M70/M50 playback screen will be the actual recording date/time. If error occurs with USB connection, the transfer rate is not sufficient. It is recommended that you use a USB terminal conforming to USB2.0 when connecting the DVD video camera/recorder. The temperature of VDR-M70/M50 is too high due to continuous operation. operation. Disconnect the VDR-M70/M50 from PC, remove the disc from VDR-M70/M50, set the power switch to "POWER OFF", and then leave it as is until the temperature decreases. After checking that the temperature has gone down, use a brand-new disc and restart operation. The USB terminal of PC may be faulty. Connect the VDR-M70/M50 to another USB terminal of PC. If your PC is desktop type, it is recommended that you use USB terminal on the back of PC. If you are using USB2.0 extended card, it is also recommended that you install the newest version driver provided each USB2.0 card maker. 28 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Cause and Correction This problem may be solved if the software related to DVD-RAM/R/RW built into PC is upgraded, or if the UDF driver is uninstalled. However, if the OS of PC is Windows 98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional, uninstalling the UDF driver will make it impossible for the photos recorded on DVD-RAM disc in VDR-M70/M50 to be read by the PC. Video is not recognized by Is the power switch of VDR-M70/M50 set to "VIDEO" or “PHOTO (disc)”? software in PC. Set it to "VIDEO" or “PHOTO (disc). DVD-R disc cannot be played DVD-MovieAlbumSE is exclusively for DVD-RAM disc. When playing back back on DVDDVD-R disc on PC, use generally available DVD-R disc playback software. MovieAlbumSE Error appears when starting Make sure that your PC display adapter (video card) conforms to DirectX8.1 DVD-MovieAlbumSE Video written to hard disk of The specifications state that DVD-MovieAlbumSE complies only with images PC using DVDrecorded on DVD-RAM disc: It cannot edit video (DVD-VR) data stored on hard MovieAlbumSE copy tool disk of PC. To edit image data stored on hard disk, copy the data to DVD-RAM cannot be edited. disc and then edit it. When DVD -MovieAlbumSE Is a disc other than DVD-RAM loaded? software provided with VDR- Load a DVD-RAM disc. DVD-MovieAlbumSE is exclusively for DVD-RAM disc. Use the following procedure to select the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded. M70/M50 is started, 1) Click the "Preference" button in the dialog box. "Disc in Drive X: cannot be 2) Click "Preference". used on MovieAlbum" 3) Click "Device Setting". appears (a letter showing 4) Choose the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded in the "Drive Select" column, the drive where disc is loaded appears in X). and then click "OK". An image that should have Use the following procedure to select the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded. been recorded does not 1) Click the "Preference" button at the top right of DVD-MovieAlbumSE screen. appear when DVD2) Click "Preference". MovieAlbumSE is started. 3) Click "Device Setting". 4) Choose the drive where DVD-RAM disc is loaded in the "Drive Select" column, and then click "OK". Executing “Export” on DVD- Do not choose “Simple Export”: If you do, reading will stop midway. MovieAlbumSE will interrupt reading midway When executing “Export” on a) If photo is included in the range of “export”, it may take more time because DVD-MovieAlbumSE, it will data must be re-encoded and read. take time to read b) If “Divide by Maker” is not chosen, it may take some time because data will be read while being re-encoded. "Hardware Removal" results Making sure the ACCESS/PC indicator on VDR-M70/M50 goes out, turn in error the PC off, and then unplug the PC connection cable from VDR-M70/M50. If your PC uses Windows 2000 Professional, the problem may be solved it you install Windows 2000 Service Pack 3 or later. “USBNTMAP.SYS not You have designated a folder which is different from that for Windows when found” appears while installing USB driver: Designate the correct folder. installing USB driver Make sure that you have already installed the driver provided with the USB2.0 No USB HS (high speed) card. You will need to install the driver provided by USB2.0 card maker in connection even when USB2.0 card is used order to operate the USB2.0 card at HS (high speed). DVD-RAM/R/RW drive built into PC cannot be used after the provided software has been installed. 29 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Cause and Correction “DISC ERROR” appears A disc that was write-protected using the write-protect setting tool (WPTOOL) when releasing write-protect equipped with the UDF driver on the CD-ROM provided with this DVD video camera/recorder cannot be released on this DVD video camera/recorder as is. Use the write-protect setting tool on PC to release the write-protect. The “capture” function of The “capture” function of MyDVD is only for DVD camera with i.Link MyDVD is unavailable. connection: It is not available on this VDR-M70/M50. Use DVD-MovieAlbumSE to import the images recorded on DVD-RAM disc into the PC. Miscellaneous Power does not come on, or no operation occurs by pressing button. The date and time are incorrect. No scene can be deleted. Disc cannot be removed. VDR-M70PP/M50PP cannot be operated from remote control. Execute system reset (disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger, and then use a fine tipped pen, etc. to hold down the RESET button for several seconds). Then connect a battery or AC adapter/charger and make sure the VDR-M70/ M50 accepts operation. System reset will return the date/time and all items set using menu (except for LCD settings) to the defaults at the factory. After recovery, reset the date/time and each setting item as required. Has VDR-M70/M50 been subjected to impact? The VDR-M70/M50 could be damaged. Has the VDR-M70/M50 been left unused for a long period of time? The internal backup battery may be discharged: Charge it. (Charge procedure: Connect the AC adapter/charger to the VDR-M70/M50 and AC outlet, set the power switch on VDR-M70/M50 to "POWER OFF", and then leave them for at least 24 hours.) Is the cursor placed on scene to be deleted? Even if desired scenes are selected using yellow cursor, if there are the selected scenes (in red frame), those scenes in red frame will be deleted. Check the color of cursor and bar graph on the thumbnail display screen. Is battery or AC adapter/charger (power supply) connected? With the VDR-M70/M50, a disc cannot be removed unless a power supply is connected. Has disc rotation stopped? Making sure the disc stops, and then restart operation. Disc cannot be removed until rotation has stopped. Did you disconnect the battery or AC adapter/charger (power supply) while the disc was being accessed? Reconnect power supply, set the power switch to "VIDEO", and then remove the disc after the sound showing the disc lock has been released is heard. If the disc still cannot be removed, the VDR-M70/M50 is faulty: Refer to "4-8 Procedure for Removing Disc from Faulty VDR-M70/M50". Is the remote control pointed at the infrared receiver on VDR-M70/M50? Point it at the infrared receiver on VDR-M70/M50. Is the infrared receiver on VDR-M70/M50 exposed to direct sunlight or strong fluorescent light? The remote control cannot operate VDR-M70/M50 when strong light strikes the infrared receiver. Adjust the position or angle of VDR-M70/M50. Is there a battery in the remote control? Also check the polarities of battery. Replace the battery if necessary. Is VDR-M70/M50 powered? Turn it on. 30 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Disc cover cannot be closed. Operating sound is heard cyclically. VDR-M70/M50 vibrates. Cause and Correction Is disc correctly loaded? Remove the disc and then reload it. Is round DVD holder being used? A bare disc that is not in round DVD holder, or is in a square cartridge or caddy, cannot be used. Put disc in the round DVD holder. Is round DVD holder inserted in the proper orientation? Remove the round DVD holder, make sure of the orientation, and then reinsert it. Is VDR-M70/M50 turned on? Connect the AC adapter/charger or full charged battery and set the power switch to a position other than “POWER OFF”. This sound is heard because the disc is cyclically operated; it does not indicate a fault. This does not indicate a fault. These vibrations or sound are generated when the disc drive unit is operating. Slight sound is heard from VDR-M70/M50. 31 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.4. MESSAGES AND TROUBLESHOOTING Some messages may appear on the LCD screen or in the viewfinder during operation. If a message appears, refer to the following table and perform troubleshooting according to the message. Messages divided by broken lines will automatically appear in sequence from the upper row each time the center of joystick is pressed. Cause/condition for message to appear Message Battery is almost empty. Replace it. Appears if the battery is discharged. Cannot combine scene. Appears if an attempt is made to combine unconnected scenes: The specifications state that combining of only multiple scenes is possible. Appears if an attempt is made to combine scenes when a photo was selected: The specification state that combining of only video scenes is possible. Appears when combining one scene was attempted. Appears when user performed deletion at the upper limit of 999 scenes registered. Cannot combine. Deselect PHOTO scenes. Cannot combine. Select multiple scenes. Cannot delete scenes. Troubleshooting Replace with a charged battery, or use the AC adapter/charger to power VDR-M70/M50. Stop trying to combine scenes, or create a play list containing the scenes to be combined, and combine them on the play list. Select only video scenes, or stop trying to combine scenes. Select multiple scenes and then combine them. Combine divided scenes, and then delete if necessary.*2 *1 Cannot execute. Unselect multiple scenes. Cannot execute. Change display category to All. CANNOT RECORD PHOTOS. Appears if an attempt is made to select multiple scenes for division: The specifications state that dividing multiple scenes is impossible. Appears when combining or moving scenes was instructed with “Category: VIDEO or PHOTO” specified. Appears if an attempt is made to record photos on DVD-R disc: The specifications state that no photo is recordable on DVD-R disc. Divide scenes one by one. Specify “Category: All”, and then operate VDR-M70/M50 again. Use a DVD-RAM disc or card when recording photos. *1: the DVD video recording format defines the maximum number of entry points as 999: Since one entry point is allocated to one scene, the maximum number of scenes recordable on disc with VDR-M70/ M50 is 999. *2: If recording is continued without editing, one scene will comprise one cell for each entry point. When scenes are combined, only the number of entry points will decrease (only the entry point is deleted); the number of cells will not decrease. Assume, for example, that the number of cells before scenes are combined is 999, which is the upper limit defined by the DVD video recording format. If a scene comprising one cell is divided at two points and the scene between the divided scenes needs to be deleted, the cell must be further divided in order to delete. However, since the number of cells has reached the upper limit in this case, the cell cannot be divided and the scene cannot be deleted. 32 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Cause/condition for message to appear Message Cannot replace thumbnail on PHOTO scenes. Cannot select any more scenes CARD ALMOST FULL Card error has occurred. Format the card now? Card error has occurred. Formatting is not complete. Card error has occurred. Keep card inside & restart. Card error. Card full. Card full. Cannot execute. Card is not formatted. Format the card now. YES NO Appears when a photo thumbnail was selected for change in scene editing menu: The specifications stipulate that the thumbnail of photo cannot be changed. Appears when the number of scenes selected on card has exceeded the upper limit of 999 scenes. Appears when the remaining recordable number of photos is less than 10 during recording. Appears when a card initialized on PC, etc., or a card whose initialization was interrupted before, is loaded. Appears when a damaged card is initialized. Troubleshooting Select a video to change the thumbnail. Release the selection of unnecessary scenes. Prepare another card, or delete unnecessary photos. Choose “YES” and designate it to initialize the card (deleting all recorded data). Replace the card. Appears when no photo could be recorded Set the power switch to “POWER on card normally. OFF”, and after several seconds, set it to “[CARD]PHOTO”. Initialize the card (deleting all recorded data). Appears when the card cannot be Use a dry cloth to clean the card recognized because its terminals are terminals. dirty. Also appears when data other than Replace the card. photos is recorded on card. Appears when the recording capacity of Replace the card, or delete card has reached the limit during unnecessary photos recording. . Appears when a card whose remaining Replace the card, or delete recording capacity is small, and on which unnecessary photos. no photo can be recorded, is loaded. Appears when the remaining capacity of Replace the card, or delete card has reached the recordable limit. unnecessary photos. Appears when an unformatted card or a Choose “YES” and designate it when card formatted on PC was loaded. formatting card (deleting all recorded data). 33 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Message Control Information Error. Cause/condition for message to appear Appears if mismatch has occurred between the recorded video and the scene information because editing was performed near the limit of disc storage capacity on a device other than VDRM70/M50; it also appears if the control information file was operated. Also appears when reading or writing from/to recorded file cannot be performed because the disc is dirty. Troubleshooting Update the control information. (Start Disc Navigation, press the MENU button, and then execute “Update Control Info.” in the “Disc” menu. Clean the disc, or replace it. Disc cleaning method: Use soft cloth to clean from inner to outer circumference in axial direction. [Never use solvent.] COPY PROTECT Appears if an attempt is made to record copy-guarded image. The specifications state that copy-guarded image cannot be recorded on VDR-M70/M50. Data error in a part of image Appears if writing to file cannot be completed normally because power was file. turned off by mistake during video Repair disc now? recording or editing, and an abnormality YES NO in part of the file is recognized. Also appears when condensation occurs on lens or drive of VDR-M70/M50. Condensation will occur when the VDRM70/M50 is moved from a cold place to a warm place. *3: a) b) c) Stop trying to record. Choose “YES” and designate partial repair (automatic repair) of video file. Choosing “NO” will display a message for verifying initialization.*3 Do not execute repair, but set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, and then leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a dry place until condensation disappears (usually 1-2 hours). Take care with the following when repairing video file: If the disc is removed while it is being recognized, the repair function of video file will be invalid. If the timing when power is turned off is inappropriate, normal repair may be impossible. If the disc has data that was recorded on a device other than VDR-M70/M50, normal repair may be impossible. d) The repaired data may be different from the original recorded content because of partial deletion of a defective portion. e) The repaired data (only corrected portion in case of partial repair) will lose the original date/time information because the information for date/time when repair was executed will be added. f) If “all repair” is executed, repair will be made in the order of all videos and all photos, and the timesequential relationship of recorded contents may be lost. 34 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Cause/condition for message to appear Message Data error in all image file. Repair all data now? YES NO DISC ×××× (4-digit alpha-numerals showing the code of trouble will appear in ××××.) DISC ACCESS DISC ALMOST FULL Disc error Disc error has occurred. Finalizing is not complete. Appears if writing to file cannot be completed normally because power was turned off by mistake during video recording or editing, and it is recognized that the video file must be totally repaired. Also appears when condensation occurs on lens or drive of VDR-M70/M50. Condensation will occur when the VDRM70/M50 is moved form a cold place to a warm place. Appears if the self-diagnosis function in VDR-M70/M50 detects a serious problem. This message appears during normal operation process, when VDR-M70/ M50 checks whether a proper disc has been loaded or not. It is displayed for a longer time period when the date has changed. This message appears during normal operation process, when the recorded images are being stored on disc. Appears if the remaining video recordable time on disc is less than 10 minutes, or the remaining number of recordable photos is less than 10. Appears when the disc has been edited on a device other than VDR-M70/ M50, and mismatch has occurred in recorded data. Also appears when reading or writing from/to recorded file cannot be performed because the disc is dirty. Appears when the disc could not be finalized because it was dirty. Appears if accident, such as power off, has occurred during finalizing. If the message still appears even when the disc has been cleaned and finalized again and again, the disc may be defective. 35 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Troubleshooting Choose “YES” and designate total repair (automatic repair) of video file. Choosing “NO” will display a message for verifying initialization. [Refer to *3 page 4-14] Do not execute repair, but set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, and then leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a dry place until condensation disappears (usually 1-2 hours). Take note of the 4-digit alphanumerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5 Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubelshooting”. Operate VDR-M70/M50 after the message disappears. Operate VDR-M70/M50 after the message disappears. Delete unnecessary scenes, or replace the disc. Format the disc (deleting all recorded data), or replace the disc. Clean the disc, or replace it. [Refer to page 4-14] Clean the disc, or replace it. [Refer to page 4-14] Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” and reconnect the AC adapter/ charger; then set the power switch to “VIDEO” and start finalizing again. Or press the DISC EJECT button, reload the disc, and then execute finalizing. Replace the disc. VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Message Disc error has occurred. Format the disc now? YES NO Disc error has occurred. Formatting is not complete. Disc error has occurred. Keep disc inside & restart. Disc full. Cannot execute. Disc has no data. Disc has no PlayList. Disc includes protected scenes. Delete scenes? YES NO Disc is full. Cannot add control info. Disc is not formatted. Format the disc now? YES NO Cause/condition for message to appear Appears when a DVD-RAM disc initialized on PC, etc., or a card whose initialization was suspended before, is loaded. Appears when the disc could not be normally formatted because it was dirty. Also appears when a warped or distorted disc was loaded, or a logically damaged disc whose formatting was suspended is loaded. Appears if a problem has occurred during editing of video file. Appears if the recording capacity of disc has reached the limit during editing of video file. Appears when the MANU button or playback button was pressed with no scene recorded. Appears if switching of play list is selected with no play list registered. Appears if the loaded disc has a program (scene) that is write-protected by the software write-protect function, which is effective in program units. Although the VDR-M70/M50 is equipped with a software disc-protect function that is effective for disc units, it does not comply with software write-protect for program units. (The DVD Forum defines two types of software protect for DVD-RAM disc: disc units and program units.) Appears if the number of scenes on play list exceeds the upper limit (999) while control information is being added. [Refer to *1 page 4-12] Appears when an unformatted DVDRAM disc or one initialized (other UDF2.0) on PC is loaded. Also appears if user rejects partial repair or total repair of video file. 36 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Troubleshooting Choose “YES” and designate it to initialize the DVD-RAM disc (deleting all recorded data). Clean the disc, or replace it. [Refer to page 4-14] Replace the disc. Exit the Disc Navigation function and set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded; then reconnect the AC adapter/charger and set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”. (The VDR-M70/ M50 will automatically repair the video file.) Delete unnecessary scenes, or replace the disc. Operate VDR-M70/M50 after the message disappears. Operate VDR-M70/M50 after the message disappears. Release the write-protect using the device that has the software writeprotect function for program units, or choose “YES” and designate it to delete the scenes. Delete any unnecessary scenes, or combine several scenes, and then operate the VDR-M70/M50. When initializing it (deleting all recorded data), choose “YES” and designate it. Choose “NO” and designate partial repair or total repair. When initializing it (deleting all recorded data), choose “YES” and designate it. VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Cause/condition for message to appear Message Disc is not formatted. If it formats, it becomes possible to use for camera. However, when you record from PC connection terminal, please do not format. Format the disc now? YES NO Disc overheat. Please retry later. Troubleshooting Appears when a brand-new DVD-R disc was loaded. When recording on VDR-M70/M50, choose “YES” and designate it. When recording video edited on PC connected via the PC connection terminal, choose “NO” and designate it.*4 Appears when the temperature inside VDR-M70/M50, or the temperature of disc, is too high, and normal operation cannot be executed. Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, and then leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a well-ventilated place until the inside temperature decreases. Specify “Slide Show: All”, or do not try slide show. DPOF is not set to scene Appears if “Slide Show: DPOF” is specified when a card for which DPOF has not been set is loaded. DPOF scenes over limit. Appears when the number of settable Cannot set DPOF scenes. scenes for DPOF has exceeded 999. DVD-R Disc, Video mode Appears if an attempt is made to change cannot be changed. the Video recording mode of a recorded DVD-R disc. Once even one scene is recorded on a DVD-R disc which has been initialized, the originally designated Video recording mode is specified to be maintained until the final recording on the disc. Also appears after the DVD-R disc has been initialized. END OF DISC Appears if the disc recordable capacity has reached the limit during recording. End scene cannot be divided. Appears when the last image of scene was selected to divide the scene: The specifications state that dividing a scene at its end is not possible. Error has occurred. Appears if the self-diagnosis function of Error code No. ×××× VDR-M70/M50 has detected a serious Please read the manual. problem when power was turned on, (4-digit alpha-numerals or the same trouble occurred three showing the code of trouble consecutive times in modes other than will appear in ××××.) recording. Release unnecessary DOPF setting on photos when newly setting DPOF. Stop trying to change the Video recording mode, or replace the disc. Operate VDR-M70/M50 after the message disappears. Replace the disc. Stop trying to divide a scene. Take note of the 4-digit alphanumerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5 Self-Diagnosis Function and Remedy”. *4: The purpose of formatting DVD-R disc on VDR-M70/M50 is to write to disc a program exclusively for camera recording that is necessary to record images shot by camera in real time (increasing the response from disc). When recording images that were edited using PC on DVD-R disc via the PC connection terminal, do not format the disc: The program used exclusively for camera recording will disable normal recording. 37 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Message Cause/condition for message to appear Error has occurred. Please reinsert a disc. Appears if, when power was turned on, the self-diagnosis function of VDRM70/M50 detected a slight trouble that can be fixed: See “4-5 SelfDiagnosis Function and Troubleshooting” for details. Appears if, when power was turned on, Error has occurred. the self-diagnosis function of VDRPlease restart. M70/M50 detected a slighttrouble that can be fixed by turning power on again: See “4-5 Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubleshooting” for details. Appears if repair has failed with DVDError occurred. Please replace disc or format RAM disc after message “Data error in all image file. Repair all data now?” or disc “Found error in image file. Repair data now?” appeared. Appears if repair has failed with DVD-R Error occurred. disc after message “Data error in all Please replace disc. image file. Repair all data now?” or “Found error in image file. Repair data now?” appeared. Appears if the self-diagnosis function in ERROR ×××× VDR-M70/M50 detects a serious (4-digit alpha-numerals problem during recording, or when the showing the code of trouble same trouble occurs three times will appear in ××××.) consecutively during recording. Appears if accident, such as power off, Finalize may not be occurred during finalizing, and then complete. power was turned on again or disc was Finalize again now? YES NO reloaded. Found error in image file. Appears if repair has failed after Repair disc now? message “Data error in a part of image YES NO file. Repair disc now?” appeared. It is unrecordable on this card. Appears when a card other than SD memory card or MultiMediaCard was loaded. 38 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Troubleshooting Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, press the DISC EJECT button, and then reinsert the disc. After that, set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”. Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reconnect the AC adapter/ charger or battery, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”. Initialize the disc (deleting all recorded data), or replace the disc. Replace the disc. Take note of the 4-digit alphanumerals in ××××, and refer to “4-5 Self-Diagnosis Function and Troubelshooting”. Choose “YES” and designate it to finalize the disc. Choose “YES” and designate total repair (automatic repair) of video file. Choosing “NO” will display a message for verifying initialization. [Refer to *3 on page 4-14] Insert an SD memory card or MultiMediaCard. VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Cause/condition for message to appear Message JPEG file related to scenes are not found. No card No card. Please insert card. NO DISC Appears when an attempt is made to copy photos on disc to card, when photo (JPEG) file to be copied is not stored on disc. When VDR-M70/M50 records a photo on disc, two photo files will be stored on disc - a photo (conforming to DVD video recording format) file to be displayed on VDR-M70/M50, and a photo (JPEG) file for storage that is linked to the photo for display. This message will appear when only the photo file for storage has been deleted on PC, etc. Appears when no card is loaded. Appears when recording photos on card was attempted with no card loaded. Appears if no disc is loaded. If the message appears even when a disc is loaded, condensation might have occurred on lens or drive of VDR-M70/ M50. No more scenes. Play List was deleted. Appears during user operation; all recorded scenes have been deleted and cleared. The specifications stipulate that a play list with no scene on it cannot be held: If all registered scenes have been deleted, the play list will also be deleted. Play Lists over limit. Appears if an attempt is made to create a new play list or edit play list after the number of registered play lists has reached the upper limit (99) that is defined by the DVD video recording format. Same scenes on PlayList will This message appears during user be deleted. operation, if even one play list has been Delete scenes? created during scene deletion. This YES NO message does not appear when a scene is deleted from play list. Scenes over limit. Appears if an attempt is made to register Cannot add scenes. a new scene in play list, with the specified 999 upper limit scenes registered. [Refer to *1 page 4-12] Scenes over limit. Appears if an attempt is made to divide a Cannot divide scenes. scene with the specified 999 upper limit scenes registered, or the number of scenes will exceed 999 with division. [Refer to *1 page 4-12] 39 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Troubleshooting Copy photos to card via PC. The photo (JPEG) file for storage is stored in DCIM\100HPNX1 folder. Insert a card. Insert a card. Load a disc Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, and then leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a dry place until condensation disappears (usually 1-2 hours). Operate VDR-M70/M50 after the message disappears. Delete unnecessary scenes before creating a new play list or editing play list. Choose “YES” and designate it to delete selected scenes. Delete unnecessary scenes from play list before adding a new scene to it. Delete unnecessary scenes before dividing a scene. VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Message Scenes over limit. Cannot move scenes. Stop processing. There was no scene which can be deleted. This card cannot be used. Please replace card. This disc cannot be used. Please replace disc. Cause/condition for message to appear Appears if an attempt is made to move a scene at the upper limit of 999 scenes registered, or the number of scenes will exceed 999 by moving a scene. [Refer to *1 page 4-12] This message appears during operation process. It will appear when user interrupted any process by pressing the stop/cancel button when processing multiple scenes, etc. Appears when only multiple locked scenes were selected using the Disc Navigation function, and deleting them was attempted. Appears when a card other than SD memory card or MultiMediaCard was loaded. Appears when a type of disc that cannot be used on VDR-M70/M50 was loaded. Troubleshooting Delete unnecessary scenes before moving scenes. Operate VDR-M70/M50 after the message disappears. Use the Disc Navigation function to unlock the scenes, and then restart operation. Insert an SD memory card or MultiMediaCard. Check the type of disc and insert a disc usable on VDR-M70/M50. This disc is recorded by the PAL system. Please replace disc. Appears when a disc recorded in the PAL Use a disc recorded in the NTSC system was loaded: The VDR-M70/M50 system. is exclusively for the NTSC system and does not comply with the PAL system. Top scenes cannot be divided. Appears when the first image of scene was selected to divide the scene: The specifications state that dividing a scene at its top is not possible. Appears when an unformatted or logically damaged disc was loaded. Also appears when a dirty disc was loaded. If the message appears when a normal, formatted disc has been loaded, condensation might have occurred on the lens or drive of VDR-M70/M50. Condensation will occur when the VDRM70/M50 is moved from a cold place to a warm place. UNFORMAT DISC 40 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Stop trying to divide a scene. Format the disc (deleting all recorded data), or replace the disc. Clean the disc, or replace it. [Refer to page 4-14] Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, and then leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a dry place until condensation disappears (usually 1-2 hours). VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Cause/condition for message to appear Message Troubleshooting Use AC adapter/charger. Appears if a battery is used when finalizing a DVD-R disc. The specifications state that DVD-R disc can be finalized only when the AC adapter/ charger powers the VDR-M70/M50. Terminate the Disc Navigation function, set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, remove the battery, and then connect the AC adapter/charger: Finalize the disc again. Use AC adapter/charger. Turn off power. Appears if a battery is used when repairing video files. The specifications state that video files can be repaired only when the AC adapter/charger powers the VDR-M70/M50. Appears if an attempt is made to copy video to card. The specifications state that no video is unrecordable on card. Appears if a DVD-RAM disc that was write-protected for disc units by software disc-protect function is loaded, or if an attempt is made to record on writeprotected disc. Appears when an SD memory card whose erasure prevention switch was locked is loaded. Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, remove the battery, and then connect the AC adapter/charger. [Refer to *3 page 4-14] Stop trying to copy a video, or select photos and execute copy. VIDEO scene cannot be copied to card. Write protected. Check disc. Write-protected. Check card. Release the software disc-protect. Unlock the erasure prevention switch of SD memory card. Note: The listed messages are subject to change without notice for improvement of performance. 41 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.5. SELF-DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION AND TROUBLESHOOTING Restriction: The information included in this section is exclusively for service personnel. Do not disclose it to persons other than service engineers. The VDR-M70/M50 is equipped with a self-diagnosis function: If it detects a problem when power is turned on or during operation, it will display a message, replace the content of problem with an error code (4-digit alphanumeric characters), and then store it in flash memory. 4.5.1. Message displayed by self-diagnosis function There are two types of message displayed when the self-diagnosis function detects problems: messages for minor problems, and messages for serious problems. Information: The messages of self-diagnosis function will be displayed until the power switch is set to “POWER OFF” or the disc is removed, regardless of whether there is a minor or serious problem. (1) Messages for minor problems These messages appear when troubleshooting is likely possible for the problem detected when power was turned on, following the procedure below. Procedure when message shown in Fig. 4-5-1 appears: Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reconnect the AC adapter/charger or battery, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”. Procedure when message shown in Fig. 4-5-2 appears: Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, press the DISC EJECT button, and then reinsert the disc. After that, set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO (disc)”. If the problem is handled by the procedure shown above, servicing is not necessary in almost all cases. However, if the VDR-M70/M50 cannot be restored from the problem or the same problem recurs, appropriate servicing will be required. The information on minor problems will be stored in flash memory as error codes (4-digit alphanumeric characters), whether or not the VDR-M70/M50 is restored from the problems. See “4-5-2 Error codes stored in flash memory” for how to display the stored error codes. 42 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals ! Error has occurred. Please restart. Fig. 4-5-1 Message for Minor Problem (1/2) ! Error has occurred. Please reinsert a disc. Fig. 4-5-2 Message for Minor Problem (2/2) VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (2) Messages for serious problems These messages appear when solving the problem detected when power is turned on or during operation is not likely by turning power on again or reloading the disc: Error codes (4-digit alphanumeric characters) will directly appear, and similar messages will appear if a problem from the same cause occurs three times consecutively during operation. If messages for serious problems appear, perform troubleshooting according to “4-5-3 Major error codes and troubleshooting”. The error codes appearing with messages will be stored in flash memory. See “4-5-2 Error codes stored in flash memory” for how to display the stored error codes. ! Error has occurred. Error code No. 1100 Please read the manual. Fig. 4-5-3 Example of Message for Serious Problem (displayed in modes other than during power on or recording) ERROR : 1100 Fig. 4-5-4 Example of Message for Serious Problem (displayed during recording) 43 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.5.2. Error codes stored in flash memory (1) Displaying error codes and clearing them Display method 1) Use the battery or AC adapter/charger to power VDRM70/M50, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO”. Error codes 2) Display the error using the following button operation: Press the SELECT button and release it; then, within 0.5 second, simultaneously hold down the SELECT and FOCUS buttons for at least 3 seconds. Display clearing method 1) Press the DISPLAY button. After displaying and checking error code, be sure to clear the error code display: If you neglect this, the error code will always be displayed. (2) Details of error code display 1) Error codes of 2 problems are displayed one above the other. The error code of the latest problem appears in the upper row, and the error code of the problem that occurred before appears in the lower row. However, when the same problem occurs continuously, it will be judged as one problem, and the same error code will not appear continuously. 2) If only one error code is stored in flash memory, the error code will appear in the upper row, and “0000” will appear in the lower row. 3) If no error code is stored in flash memory, “0000” will appear in both rows. 44 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 1100 0400 Fig. 4-5-5 Example of Error Code Display VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.5.3. Major error codes and troubleshooting Table 4-5-1 shows the error codes that are likely to frequently appear, and troubleshooting when they appear. If error codes other than those listed in Table 4-5-1 appear, check with the factory for troubleshooting. Error code Table 4-5-1 Major Error Codes and Troubleshooting (1/2) Contents of problem Troubleshooting 0400 Recognition of disc failed. 1100 Reading of data from disc failed. 10AE 10AF 0280 Disc physically damaged, i.g., scratched or distorted. The optical pickup in disc drive unit failed to move. Recognition of disc failed. [This message is likely to appear frequently when the ambient temperature is too low (0°C or less)]. 2881 1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc). Take care not to subject VDR-M70/M50 to impact or vibrations at this time. 2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or distorted. If it is dirty, clean it referring to the next page, and then reload it. If it is scratched or distorted, use another disc. Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc). 3) Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is dirty, scratched or distorted. Replace the disc. 1) Check the ambient temperature. 2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or distorted. If it is dirty, clean it, and then reload it. If it is scratched or distorted, replace the disc. Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc). Disc cleaning method: Use soft cloth to clean from inner to outer circumference in axial direction. [Never use solvent.] 3) Check to see whether or not condensation has occurred. If condensation has occurred, set the power switch to “POWER OFF” with the disc loaded, and then leave the VDR-M70/M50 in a dry place for 1-2 hours. 4) Replace the disc. 45 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Error code 3122 3126 3133 7601 7890 7791 3105 E000 EC87 F100 F526 F571 F572 F573 F600 F700 F924 FB24 FB34 FB44 Contents of problem Troubleshooting 1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc). Writing data file to disc failed. Take care not to subject VDR-M70/M50 to impact or vibrations at this time. It takes much more time than 2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the necessary to process start or end of disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or recording (timeout error). distorted. If it is dirty, clean it referring to the next page, and then reload it. If it is scratched or distorted, Recording on DVD-R disc failed. use another disc. Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc). 3) Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is dirty, scratched or distorted. Formatting DVD-RAM disc failed. Format it again, or replace the disc. When recording photo, writing data to 1) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, reattach the disc failed. battery or AC adapter/charger, and then set the power Writing data to disc failed. switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” (disc). Abnormal stop during reading or Take care not to subject VDR-M70/M50 to impact or writing of data from/to disc. vibrations at this time. Buffer has overflowed during 2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, remove the recording. disc and check whether or not it is dirty, scratched or When starting recording, reading of distorted. If it is dirty, clean it, and then reload it. If it data file on disc failed. is scratched or distorted, replace the disc. When recording photo, writing data to Then set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO” disc failed. (disc). When recording video, writing data to 3) When using DVD-R disc: disc failed. Replace the disc without regard as to whether it is Backup error dirty, scratched or distorted. No response from disc drive even when When using DVD-RAM disc: 3 minutes has elapsed (drive timeout Initialize the disc (deleting all data recorded on error). disc), or replace the disc. Recording failed Initialization at start of recording failed. While recording mode was being transferred to recording pause, writing data to disc failed. During processing of buffer overflow error, writing data to disc failed. Recording on DVD-RAM disc failed. 46 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.6. CHECKING VERSIONS OF FIRMWARE AND UPDATING The VDR-M70/M50 stores the 4 types of firmware shown in Table 4-6-1 in flash memory. These firmware programs will be updated whenever necessary to improve the performance of VDRM70/M50. Check to see whether any defects in VDR-M70/M50 can be eliminated by updating any firmware programs: If improvement is likely, update them. Information: If any corrections in firmware are made at the factory, the information on how to obtain the firmware data and create a disc or card containing upgraded firmware will be reported on service bulletin, etc. Table 4-6-1 List of VDR-M70/M50 Firmware Programs Type of firmware System firmware Camera microprocessor firmware Drive main firmware Drive core firmware 4.6.1. Description Software that drives SH CPU: Controls the operation of entire system, including recording, playback, Disc Navigation, connections with external device Controls the operation of camera block (including optical system), clock, battery, input/output These programs control the DVD disc drive system (mechanism block) Remarks Does not require updating Checking firmware versions (1) Purpose When checking whether updating firmware is needed or not, use the following procedure to view the information display or version display screen (see Fig. 4-6-1) and check the version number. Only the titles at top left of screens will be different when no disc is loaded or disc is loaded; the other display contents will be the same. (2) Version display/clear method Display method 1) Connect the battery or AC adapter/charger to power the VDR-M70/M50. 2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” to set VDR-M70/M50 to the recording pause status. Operate VDR-M70/M50 while viewing the LCD screen or viewfinder from this point. 3) When a disc is loaded, press the DISC NAVIGATION button to display the thumbnail display screen: This step is not necessary if no disc is loaded. 4) Operate the following buttons to view the detaill display screen (with no disc loaded) or version display screen (with disc loaded): Tilt the joystick up and hold it, then simultaneously press the SELECT button and REC buttons. Display clearing method 1) Press the stop/cancel button to restore the thumbnail display screen. To return to the normal screen, press the DISC NAVIGATION button. 47 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (3) Details of detaill/version display screens When no disc is loaded Table 4-6-2 Details of Information/Version Display Screens Item Model System Ver. Date Cam Ver. Drive (Main) Drive (Core) Display contents Model name Version number of system firmware Date/time when system firmware was created Version number of Camera microprocessor firmware Version number of drive main firmware Version number of drive core firmware Information: Display ×××× on subsequent screen shows the numbers or alphabets. Detail Model: DVR-M70-PAL System: Ver. x.xx Date: xxxx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx Cam: Ver. x.xx Drive (Main): xxxx.xx.xx. REV Drive (Core): xxxx.xx.xx. REV RETURN When disc is loaded Version Model: VDR-M70-PAL System: Ver. x.xx Date: xxxx/xx/xx xx:xx:xx Cam: Ver. x.xx Drive (Main): xxxx.xx.xx. REV Drive (Core): xxxx.xx.xx. REV RETURN Fig. 4-6-1 4.6.2. Updating firmware (1) Purpose If you receive information from the factory that updating firmware is needed, you should do it to improve the performance, functions and operability of VDR-M70/M50. 48 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (2) Procedure for updating 1) Acquire the data for updating of firmware and create a disc or card for updating. Information on how to obtain the firmware data and create a disc/card containing upgraded firmware will be reported on service bulletin, etc. 2) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and then use the AC adapter/charger to power the VDRM70/M50. A battery cannot be used because it may interrupt power of VDR-M70/M50 during work. 3) Insert the disc/card for updating firmware. 4) Set the power switch to “POWER OFF” when using a disc for updating, or to “[CARD]PHOTO” when using a card for updating. 5) After approx. 20 seconds, the updating start screen (Fig. 4-6-2) will appear, and the firmware programs will be automatically updated thereafter. During updating, the screens showing that designated firmware program is being updated will appear, followed by the screen showing that updating is complete. However, not all firmware programs need updating every time: The same version screen will appear for firmware programs that do not require updating. 6) When all required updating is complete, the screen for verifying the version of updated firmware will appear, and the updated firmware will be displayed in red. 7) To complete updating, set the power switch to “POWER OFF”, and then remove the disc/card for updating. Updating Start Screen Firmware Update Start Firmware update. System Update Screen Firmware Update Updating system. Do not turn off power. Drive (Core) Update Screen Firmware Update Updating drive (Core). Please wait about 20 seconds. Updating Completed Screen Firmware Update Drive (Main) Update Screen Firmware Update Updating drive (Main). Please wait about 2 minutes. Do not turn off power. Screen of Verifying the Version Firmware Update Model: VDR-M70-PAL Firmware updated. System: Ver. ×.×× Drive (Main): ××××.××.××.REV Drive (Core): ××××.××.××.REV Do not turn off power. Turn off power Same Version Screen Firmware Update Same revision. Cannot update. Fig. 4-6-2 49 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.7. TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS Information: 1) Use the VFK0631 adapter/charger to power VDR-M70/M50 for trouble diagnosis. 2) The trouble diagnosis table was prepared presupposing that the circuit boards have been normally attached and connected. Therefore, make sure beforehand that the circuit boards are correctly connected, that connectors and cables are not damaged, and that the status of their connections is correct. Prohibition: During trouble diagnosis, never look directly into the objective lens of optical pickup block in disc drive unit, and take great care that the reflected laser beam does not enter your eye. 4.7.1. Trouble diagnosis table Interpreting the trouble diagnosis table: 1) Search for the defective symptom. If there are multiple check points or multiple details of check for one symptom, check the items from the top down. 2) Set the VDR-M70/M50 to a service position that matches the symptom. There are four service positions (A)-(D) for VDR-M70/M50. Set to the appropriate service position, referring to “Disassembly/reassembly to enable service position”. If only dashes — are entered in the service position column, trouble diagnosis is possible without disassembling the VDR-M70/M50. 3) Connect the measurement terminals to the check points, and collate the results with the details of check. Letters in brackets [ ] that follow the check points show the name and side of circuit board. Example: [MAN-A] shows that the check point exists on side A of MAN-H/MAN circuit board. Information: The MAN-H/MAN or AEL-H/AEL circuit board has some check points to which no terminals of test equipment can be directly connected even when the VDR-M70/M50 is set to a service position. Solder a lead wire of approx. 10 cm to such check points, referring to “Disassembly/reassembly to enable service position” and “circuit board diagrams”. When trouble diagnosis is complete, be sure to remove the lead wire. 4) Perform troubleshooting according to the check results, referring to the troubleshooting columns. 50 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Table 4-7-1 Trouble Diagnosis Table Symptom Service position No power Check points F0501 F0502 F0503 F0504 TL0504 [MAN-B] [MAN-B] [MAN-B] [MAN-B] [MAN-B] IC1503- 53 to 56 [MAN-B] (Do not solder lead wire) TL0510 [MAN-A] TL0511 [MAN-B] TL0512 [MAN-A] TL0513 [MAN-A] TL0515 [MAN-A] TL0517 [MAN-A] TL0518 [MAN-B] Date/time is incorrect TL7041 [AEL-B] Auto-focus does not operate. ----- ----- No zoom works even if zoom lever is operated. ----- ----- TL1543 [MAN-B] Detail of check Is fuse blown? Yes: Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. Is the voltage approx. 3.2 V No: DC (REG ON) when the power switch is set to "VIDEO" or "PHOTO" from "POWER OFF"? Can approx. 3 V DC (SYS3V) be confirmed? Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. Can approx. 1.5 V DC (C1.6V) be confirmed? Can approx. 3.2 V DC (CAM3V) be confirmed? Can approx. 4.8 V DC (CAM5V) be confirmed? Can approx. 3 V DC (D3V) be confirmed? Can approx. 5 V DC (D5V) be confirmed? Can approx. 2.5 V DC (D2.5V) be confirmed? Can approx. 15 V DC (C15V) be confirmed? Can approx. 3 V DC (B/U3V) Yes: Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. be confirmed? No: Replace BA1801. Even if manual focus is set Yes: Replace lens unit. and +/- buttons are operated, No: Replace MAN-H/ focus is not correct, and MAN circuit board. when power is turned on again, abnormal sound is heard from the lens and it takes more than 20 seconds before an image appears. Yes: Replace lens unit. No zoom is operated by the remote control, and when power is turned on again, abnormal sound is heard from the lens and it takes more than 20 seconds before an image appears. Can change in voltage be Yes: Replace MAN-H/ confirmed when lever is MAN circuit board. operated (T/W)? No: Replace rear cover. 51 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Troubleshooting due to check results VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Service position DISC EJECT button does not operate REC button does not operate TL1547 [MAN-B] Left button/ joystick does not operate TL7030 [AEL-B] QUICK MODE switch does not operate TL7028 [AEL-B] No image on LCD monitor No image in viewfinder (EVF) Block noise appears during video recording Camera recorded image is abnormal No image from AV input/output terminal TL0522 [MAN-A] ----- ----TL3418 [LCD] TL3715 [AEL-B] Close LCD monitor ----- ----- [MAN-A] [MAN-A] [MAN-A] [MAN-A] [MAN-A] [MAN-A] [MAN-A] [MAN-A] ----TL6010 [MAN-B] Yes: Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. No: Replace rear cover. Yes: Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. No: Side case-L or parts on the SWL2 circuit board faulty. Can change in voltage be Yes: Replace MAN-H/ confirmed when switch MAN circuit board. (KEY2) is moved? No: Replace SW8017 on SWL3 circuit board. Does backlight turn on? Yes: Replace LCD unit. Can approx. 5 V DC (INV5V) Yes: Q3451 or Q3452 be confirmed? and its peripheral circuits are faulty. No: Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. Can video signal (EVF-G) be Yes: Replace EVF unit. No: Replace IC3701. confirmed? ---------- Replace MAN-H/MAN circuit board. Can sensor drive pulses (V1- No: 4, H1, H2, RG) be confirmed? V1 & V3 Pulse 15 0 -7 Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. V2 & V4 Pulse H1 & H2 Pulse 0 3.3 RG Pulse 13.3 -7 0 10.0 Can video signal (CCD-OUT) Yes: Replace MAN-H/ be confirmed? MAN circuit board. No: With VDR-M70, replace IC1001. With VDR-M50, replace lens unit. Does image appear on LCD No: Replace MAN-H/ monitor or in EVF? MAN circuit board. Can video signal (VIDEO) be Yes: Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. confirmed? No: IC6103 and its peripheral circuits are faulty. 52 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals check results Can change in voltage be confirmed when button is operated (EJECT SW)? Can change in voltage be confirmed when button (REC) is pressed? Can change in voltage be confirmed when button/ joystick (KEY1) is moved?} ----- TL2084 TL2085 TL2086 TL2089 TL2090 TL2091 TL2095 TL2082 Troubleshooting due to Detail of check Check points VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Service position No sound from speaker Troubleshooting due to check results TL1534 [MAN-B] TL1535 [MAN-B] No audio from AV input/output terminal Audio from builtin microphone cannot be recorded Audio from external microphone cannot be recorded Even if a normal disc is inserted, message "DISC ACCESS" continues to appear, and the disc is not recognized. Message "NO DISC" appears approx. 1 second after a normal disc is inserted. Message "NO DISC" appears within 10 seconds after a normal disc is inserted. Detail of check Check points ----- Can audio signal (SP_OUT+, Yes: Replace disc cover. SP_OUT-) be confirmed? No: IC6103 and its peripheral circuits are faulty. TL6006 [MAN-B] Can audio signal (AUD-L, Yes: Replace MAN-H/ TL6009 [MAN-B] AUD-R) be confirmed? MAN circuit board. No: IC6103 and its peripheral circuits are faulty. IC6101-1, 7, 8, 14 Can audio signal (MIC_INL, No: Built-in [AEL-A] MIC_INR) be confirmed? microphone, or (Do not solder lead IC6101 and its wire) peripheral circuits are faulty. TL6101 [AEL-B] Can audio signal (MIC_INL, Yes: IC6201 or its TL6102 [AEL-B] MIC_INR) be confirmed? peripheral circuits are faulty. No: Q6101-6104, Q6108, Q6109, Q6207, Q6208 or their peripheral circuits are faulty. IC6201-3, 4 Can audio signal Yes: IC6201 or its [AEL-A] (EXTMIC_LCH, peripheral circuits (Do not solder lead EXTMIC_RCH) be are faulty. wire) confirmed? No: Replace MAN-H/ MAN circuit board. -------------Replace disc drive unit. ----- ----- ---------- ----- ----- ---------- 53 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals If the DRF-H/DRF circuit board is not damaged or its connection status is normal, replace disc drive unit. Replace disc drive unit. VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Symptom Even when a disc not protected is inserted, message "Write protected. Check disc" appears. Even when a formatted disc is inserted, message "Disc is not formatted" appears. 4.7.2. Service position Check points Detail of check ----- ----- ---------- ----- ----- ---------- Troubleshooting due to check results Replace disc drive unit. Service position Service extension cablextension cables This model is required the following extension cables for connections. Note 1: Use the following extension cables when checking or adjusting individual circuit boards expect module parts. VDR-M70 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Part No. VFK1877 VFK1878 VFK1582A1625 VFK1442 VFK1575C2325 VFK1716 VFK1480 VFK1282 VFK1441 VFK1388 Connection (MAN) - PG7001 (AEL) (MAN) - PG2301 (DRF) (MAN) - LENS (CCD) (MAN) - DISC COVER (AEL) - LENS UNIT (AEL) - PG3401 (LCD) (AEL) - PG8012 (L CASE) (SHE) - EVF (MAN) - REAR COVER (MAN) - BATTERY COVER Pin 120PIN 0.4 BtoB 70PIN 0.4 BtoB 16PIN 0.5 FFC 21PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC 23PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC 25PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC 6PIN 0.5 FFC 22PIN 0.5 FFC 8PIN 0.5 FFC 8PIN 0.5 FFC Remarks PG1501 PG2002 PG2001 PG1502 PG1301 PG7008 PG7004 PG0153 PG1503 PG0501 Connection (MAN) - PG7001 (AEL) (MAN) - PG2301 (DRF) (MAN) - LENS (CCD) (MAN) - DISC COVER (AEL) - LENS UNIT (AEL) - PG3401 (LCD) (AEL) - PG8012 (L CASE) (SHE) - EVF (MAN) - REAR COVER (MAN) - BATTERY COVER Pin 120PIN 0.4 BtoB 70PIN 0.4 BtoB 14PIN 0.5 FFC 21PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC 22PIN 0.5 FFC 25PIN 0.3 ZZ FFC 6PIN 0.5 FFC 22PIN 0.5 FFC 8PIN 0.5 FFC 8PIN 0.5 FFC Remarks PG1501 PG2002 PG2001 PG1502 PG1302 PG7008 PG7004 PG0153 PG1503 PG0501 VDR-M50 No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Part No. VFK1877 VFK1878 VFK1364 VFK1442 VFK1282 VFK1716 VFK1480 VFK1282 VFK1441 VFK1388 54 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 55 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.7.3. Check points Overview of check points for Side A and B of MAN-H P.C.B. and Side B of AEL-H P.C.B. are as follows. Refer to C Circuit Board Diagrams. TL6101 TL6102 TL3715 TL0522 MAN-H/MAN P.C.B. Side A TL2090 TL2085 TL2086 TL2082 TL2089 TL2091 TL2084 TL2095 TL0510 TL0513 TL0515 TL7030 TL7028 TL7041 TL3701(GND) AEL-H/AEL P.C.B. Side B TL0512 TL0517 : Check points (TL: Test land) Fig. 4-7-3 Side B of AEL-H/AEL P.C.B. TL0520(GND) TL0521(GND) TL0518 TL1547 TL0504 TL0511TL1543 TL1534 TL1535 MAN-H/MAN P.C.B. Side B TL6006 TL6009 TL6010 : Check points (TL: Test land) Fig. 4-7-2 Side A and B of MAN-H/MAN P.C.B. 56 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.8. 4.8.1. PROCEDURE FOR REMOVING DISC FROM FAULTY VDR-M70/M50 Item to be checked Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery pack (power supply), making sure the ACCESS indicator turns off, and then press the DISC EJECT button again. Note: Even with normal product, the disc cannot be removed while the ACCESS indicator is lit or blinking. Information: Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery pack (power supply) before pressing the DISC EJECT button. The DISC EJECT button will work even if a power supply is not connected. Prohibition After the above check, be sure to disconnect the AC adapter/charger of battery from VDR-M70/ M50. The VDR-M70/M50 has a built-in laser emitter block. Never look into it: If laser beam strikes your eye, it could cause serious vision damage. 4.8.2. How to remove disc If the disc cannot be ejected after performing “4-8-1 Item to be checked”, remove it using the procedure in this section. Information: Numbers in diagrams are step numbers of setting procedure, and letters in brackets [ ] show the types of screw. 1) Turn the hood in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 2) Remove three screws [A], and then remove the filter piece, being careful not to scratch the lens surface with screwdriver at this time. 3) Remove the lens cover in the direction of the arrow. 4) Remove the space sheet that covers the opening for operating lock arm. 5) Use a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver, etc. to move the lock arm in the direction of the arrow, and then open the disc cover. [A] M1.7x4 (Black) LENS COVER 1) DISC COVER 2) [A] HOOD 3) LOCK ARM Information: When reinstalling removed components, use the reverse procedure to removal. Fig.4-8-1 57 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals FILTER PIECE VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.9. SPECIAL FUNCTIONS Restriction: The information included in this section is exclusively for service personnel: Do not disclose it to persons other than service engineers. 4.9.1. Forced formatting of DVD-RAM disc (1) Application/Symptom Perform this procedure when the Disc Navigation screen does not start normally due to a defect in data on disc and formatting is not possible by the procedure explained in instruction manual. (2) Operational procedure Caution: 1) Initialization will delete all data on disc: Copy the necessary files to PC, etc. 2) Do not turn power off or remove the disc during initialization: Such an interruption will make the disc unusable. 1) Use the AC adapter/charger to power VDR-M70/ M50, and set the power switch to “VIDEO” or “PHOTO”. Be sure to use the AC adapter/charger for formatting disc: If power is interrupted during work, the disc could become unusable. 2) Make sure that the DVD-RAM disc to be formatted is free from dirt or scratch. If the disc is dirty, clean it; if the disc is scratched, replace it. Any dirt or scratch on disc could disable normal formatting. (Fig. 4-9-1) 3) Insert the DVD-RAM disc to be formatted. 4) After the disc is recognized, operate the following buttons to display the disc formatting screen (Fig. 4-9-2): Hold down the SELECT, REC and + (plus) buttons simultaneously for at least 3 seconds 5) Use the joystick to choose “YES” and press the center of joystick: The initialization will start and message “Formatting ...” will appear. 6) When formatting is complete, message “Finished” will appear for several seconds, and then the normal screen will automatically be restored. 58 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Use soft cloth to clean from inner to outer circumference in axial direction. [Never use solvent.] Fig. 4-9-1 Disc cleaning method Format Disc ! Disc is not formated. Format the disc now? YES NO ENTER Fig. 4-9-2 Screen for Disc Formatting VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4.9.2. EEPROM data backup and write (1) Application Perform this work whenever you replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board on which the EEPROM is mounted. Create a backup file of the data in EEPROM to be replaced in a PC, and write the backup file to new EEPROM: Some adjustment items that are performed after replacement can be omitted. Refer to “6-3-2 List of Adjustments Needed After Replacing Major Components” for adjustment items that can be omitted. (2) Preparations 1) Connect the VDR-M70/M50, jig/tool and power supply as shown in Fig. 4-9-3. Refer to “6-1-1 List of Jigs and Tools used when Creating Reference Data” and “6-1-2 Power Supply and Materials for Creating Reference Data” for details on jig/tool and power supply in the figure. 2) Copy the adjustment program to HDD of PC. Refer to “6-1-5 Copy or Deleting Adjustment Program” for copying. 3) Start the adjustment program in order to display the adjustment menu screen on PC display. Prohibition: Completely assemble the VDR-M70/M50; create backup file of EEPROM data and write it with only the adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 4-9-3). Do not attempt to perform work with the VDR-M70/M50 disassembled: Doing so is very dangerous because the VDR-M70/M50 incorporates high-voltage circuits and a laser emitter block. Note: 1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to VDR-M70/ M50: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the VDR-M70/M50 could cause a fault. 2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up. 59 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC REMOVE THE ADJUSTMENT COVER DC POWER CORD To AC OUTLET SKYLARK CONNECTION JIG DC POWER SUPPLY (5V/1A) RED GND (PIN 16) SD RD (PIN 20) (PIN 18) POWER CABLE VFK0631 BLK PC BLK WHT YEL RS-232C CABLE DSP-R JIG Fig. 4-9-3 Connections when creating backup file of EEPROM data and writing 60 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (3) Backup method ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Information: If it is not possible to back up the data in EEPROM to be replaced because the VDR-M70/M50 is not turned on, etc., replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, and then refer to “6-4-1 Initial Data Write”. MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU 1 DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN 1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. 3) Choose Original Data Backup on the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION Note: Do not choose “Initial Data Write” on the DATA INITIALIZE MENU. Refer to “6-4-1 Initial Data Write” after backup for “Initial Data Write”. 4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen to proceed with the BACKUP FILE SELECT screen. 5) From the BACKUP FILE SELECT screen, select or set the names of folder and file in which the data is stored. This section refers to the folder and file as “EEP” and “backup.eep” for explanation: Freely select and set easyto-understand names. 6) Click the SAVE button on BACKUP FILE SELECT screen to start backup. The progress status can be confirmed using the PROGRESS STATUS dialog. 7) When backup is complete, the BACKUP FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. 8) Then click the RETURN buttons on each menu screen to restore the MODEL SELECT screen, and click the EXIT button on MODEL SELECT screen to exit the adjustment program. 9) Disconnect the VDR-M70/M50, jig/tool and power supply, and then replace the MAN-H/MAN circuit board. DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen Data Initialize FILE MENU Initial Data Write Backup Data Write Original Data Backup 8 4 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION BACKUP FILE SELECT screen ? EEP Look in (T): 5 6 File name (N): backup Save (S) File of type (T): .eep Cancel * PROGRESS STATUS dialog EEPROM Data Backup PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT BACKUP FINISHED dialog FINISHED FINISHED READING DATA OK 61 3 7 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC ADJUST MENU screen (4) Write method MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: ×××× Restrictions: Never write data of any other product. The EEPROM data includes adjustment values, etc. that are peculiar to that product: It is different for each product even if the model is the same. If you write the data of another product by mistake, rewrite the correct data. ADJUST MENU 1 DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. 3) Choose Backup Data Write on the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. 4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen to proceed with the WRITE FILE SELECT screen. 5) From WRITE FILE SELECT screen, select the folder and file in which the data has previously been backed up. This section refers to the folder and file as “EEP” and “backup.eep” for explanation. 6) Click the OPEN button on WRITE FILE SELECT screen to start writing. The progress status can be confirmed using the PROGRESS STATUS dialog. 7) When writing is complete, the INITIALIZATION FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. 8) Click the RETURN button on DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen to restore the ADJUST MENU screen, and then perform adjustment according to “6-3-2 List of Adjustments Needed After Replacing Major Components”. 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen Data Initialize FILE MENU Initial Data Write Backup Data Write 3 Original Data Backup 8 4 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION WRITE FILE SELECT screen ? EEP Look in (T): backup.eep 5 6 File name (N): backup.eep Open File of type (T): *.eep Cancel PROGRESS STATUS dialog DATA INITIALIZE PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT INITIALIZATION FINISHED dialog FINISHED FINISHED WRITING DATA OK 62 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 7 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 5 DISASSEMBLY AND REASSEMBLY 5.1. ITEM TO BE CHECKED (1) Checking Disc Connect the AC adapter/charger or charged battery (power supply), and then press the DISC EJECT button to make sure that no disc is inserted. After check, close the disc insertion block. If the disc insertion block does not open normally, refer to “4-8 Procedure for Removing Disc from Faulty VDR-M70/M50”. Prohibition After the above check, be sure to disconnect the AC adapter/charger or battery from the VDRM70/M50. The VDR-M70/M50 has a built-in laser emitter block. Never look into it: If Laser beam strikes your eye, it could cause serious vision damage. (2) Checking Card Make sure that no card is loaded in the card slot. After check, close the card slot cover. 5.2. ORDER OF DISASSEMBLY Refer to “Disassembly Flowchart” in Fig. 5-2-1 for the order of removing components. When reassembling components, use the reverse order to removal unless otherwise specified. Note: When replacing components, be sure to use only those shown in “Replacement Parts List”. Information: 1) Board names suffixed with “-H” are for VDR-M70. 2) The procedures for disassembling and reassembling the VDR-M70 and VDR-M50 are the same, except for the following components: a) SHE-H circuit board b) SHE circuit board c) Accessory shoe d) Lens unit (SEN-H circuit board, CCD image sensor, crystal filter, cushion) 3) The lens unit in VDR-M50 includes components equivalent to cushion, crystal filter, CCD image sensor and SEN-H circuit board, which are discrete from the lens unit in VDR-M70. 63 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Reading Disassembly Flowchart: After locating the target component in the flowchart, remove all components of the target in sequence, following the arrows (routes) from the top of flowchart. If multiple routes exist to the target component from the top of flowchart, remove all the components on all the routes. Parts Name Item No. Adjustment cover 5-3 (1) Food Filter piece Lens cover 5-3 (2) SAF-H/SAF circuit board L-Block 5-3 (3) Side case-L LCD Unit SWL2 circuit board Side case-L 5-3 (7) LCD case-U MR circuit board Fulcrum block Front block R-Block VDR-M70 SHE-H circuit board Accessory shoe Jack cover 5-3 (5) FRT-H/FRT circuit board Microphone Microphone cover 5-3 (6) 5-3 (4) Disc cover 5-3 (9) 5-3 (11) AEL-H/AEL circuit board MAN-H/MAN circuit board 5-3 (14) 5-3 (4) VDR-M50 SHE circuit board 5-3 (12) VDR-M50 Accessory shoe 5-3 (13) Link bracket 5-3 (16) Drive block Side case-L Fulcrum cover-U Fulcrum cover-B Fulcrum unit 5-3 (19) LCD case-B LCD circuit board 5-3 (20) Hand strap 5-3 (10) Front case USB holder USB-H/USB circuit board Rear cover EVF unit 5-3 (10) Camera block 5-3 (15) Loader DRF-H/DRF circuit board DVD Disc drive unit Lock unit Frame 5-3 (17) Fig. 5-2-1 64 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5-3 (8) 5-3 (18) VDR-M70 GYR-H circuit board Lens frame Lens unit Cushion Crystal filter CCD image sensor SEN-H circuit board 5-3 (21) VDR-M50 GYR circuit board Lens frame Lens unit 5-3 (22) VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 5.3. DISASSEMBLY Information: Numbers in disassembly procedure diagrams are step numbers for disassembling order, and letters in brackets [ ] show the types of screw. Letters in brackets ( ) show the name of parts. (1) Adjustment Cover 1) Open the LCD monitor (b). 2) Insert a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver (d) into the groove of adjustment cover (a), and remove the adjustment cover in the direction of the arrow, being very careful not to scratch the adjustment cover or side case-L (c) with screwdriver. (a) (b) (c) (d) Adjustment cover LCD monitor Side case-L Flat-bladed screwdriver (b) 1) (c) (a) (d) 2) Fig. 5-3-1 (2) Hood, Filter Piece and Lens Cover 1) Turn the hood (a) in the direction of the arrow to remove it. 2) Remove three screws [A], and then remove the filter piece (b), being careful not to scratch the lens surface with screwdriver at this time. 3) Remove the lens cover (c) in the direction of the arrow. (a) Hood (b) Filter piece (c) Lens cover (b) (c) 1) 3) 2) [A] (a) [A] M1.7x4 (Black) Fig. 5-3-2 65 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (3) SAF-H/SAF Circuit Board and L Block 1) Open the LCD monitor (c). 2) Remove three screws [A], two screws [N] and three screws [C]. 3) Close the LCD monitor and open the L block (b) from the rear in the direction of the arrow: Be careful not to damage the SAF-H/SAF circuit board (a) or flat cable between L block and R block (d). 4) Remove the SAF-H/SAF circuit board. The SAF-H/SAF circuit board is a film-like board: Do not bend or fold it. 5) Disconnect the flat cable between L and R blocks. Disconnect the flat cable between L and R blocks: Do not forcibly pull out the flat cable from connectors at this time. 6) Remove the L block from R block (d) in the direction of the arrow. (1) (1) Unlock (2) Pull (a) (b) (c) (d) SAF-H/SAF circuit board L block LCD monitor R block (2) (d) 2) [C] 2) [A] 5) (b) (c) 2) [A] 4) 1) (a) 6) Pattern no, printed side 3) 2) [C] 2) [N] Fig. 5-3-3 Right side 2) [N] [A] M1.7x4 (Black) [N] M1.7x4 (Silver) [C] M1.7x4 (Silver) 2) [A] Fig. 5-3-4 Bottom Side 66 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (4) Front Block and R Block 1) Open the jack cover (c), and then remove one screw [N]. 2) Remove one screw [N]. 3) Remove the FRT-H/FRT circuit board (d) from AEL-H/AEL circuit board (e) in the direction of the arrow. 4) Remove the front block (a) from R block (b) in the direction of the arrow. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) Front block R block Jack cover FRT-H/FRT circuit board AEL-H/AEL circuit board (b) (a) 4) (e) 3) 1) [N] (d) [N] M1.7x4 (Silver) 2) [N] (c) (5) Jack Cover 1) Release the two tabs, and then remove the jack cover (a). (a) Jack cover (b) Front block Fig. 5-3-5 (b) Tabs (a) Fig. 5-3-6 (6) FRT-H/FRT circuit board, Microphone, and Microphone Cover FRT-H/FRT circuit board (a) 1) Disconnect the flat cable from microphone. 2) Remove one screw [D], and then remove the FRT-H/FRT circuit board. Microphone (b) and Microphone Cover (c) 3) Remove one screw [D], and then remove the microphone and microphone cover from the front case (d). (a) (b) (c) (d) FRT-H/FRT circuit board Microphone Microphone cover Front Case 2) [D] (a) (d) 1) 3) [D] (b) (c) [D] M1.7x4 (Black) Fig. 5-3-7 67 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (7) Side Case L, LCD Unit, and SWL2 Circuit Board 1) Unplug the connector. Be sure to hold the connector using tweezers, etc. when unplugging it. Pulling the cable when unplugging the connector could cause wire disconnection. 2) Remove five screws [D]. 3) Remove two screws [E], and then remove the LCD unit (b) and ground plate (d) from side case-L (a). 4) Disconnect the one flat cable. 5) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the SWL2 circuit board (c). Note: Take great care when handling the LCD unit The LCD unit has an LCD panel that is a precision component. Subjecting it to impact could result in a fault. (1) [D] M1.7x4 (Black) (1) Unlock (2)Pull [E] M2x5 (Silver) (2) 2) [D] (1) (c) 4) (a) 5) [D] 2) [D] (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Side case-L LCD unit SWL2 circuit board Ground plate L cover SWL3-H/SWL3 circuit board (d) 3) [E] (b) Fig. 5-3-9 68 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals (e) VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (8) LCD Case-U, MR Circuit Board, and Fulcrum Block LCD Case-U (a) 1) Insert an awl (e), etc. into the screw hole, and turn the screw-hole bracket of fulcrum block 90° in the direction of the arrow. At this time, make no mistake with the turning direction: Turning in the wrong direction will deform fulcrum cover U. 2) Turn the fulcrum block 90° in the direction of the arrow. 3) Remove three screws [B]. 4) Release the six tabs, and then remove the LCD case-U in the direction of the arrow. The MR sheet (f) will detach at this time: Take care not to lose it. MR Circuit Board (b) 5) Disconnect the MR circuit board from the LCD circuit board (g). 6) Remove the MR circuit board in the direction of the arrow. The MR circuit board is a film-like board: Do not bend or fold it. Fulcrum Block (c) 7) Disconnect the one flat cable. 8) Remove the fulcrum block in the direction of the arrow. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) LCD case-U MR circuit board fulcrum block LCD circuit board Awl MR sheet (1) 5) (e) (1) Unlock (2) Pull 4) Tabs (b) (2) 1) 90 6) (c) (1) 4) Tabs 3) [B] (d) 2) (f) 90 7) 4) (c) 4) Tabs 8) [B] M1.7x4 (Silver) (2) (1) (1) Unlock (2) Pull Fig. 5-3-10 69 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals (a) 3) [B] VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (9) Disc Cover 1) Remove the space sheet (b) that covers the opening for operating lock arm. 2) Use a fine-tipped flat-bladed screwdriver to move the lock arm (d) in the direction of the arrow to open the disc cover (a). 3) Disconnect the one flat cable. 4) Open the card slot cover (g). 5) Remove four screws [F]. 6) Remove the disc cover in the direction of the arrow: Be careful not to damage the flat cable (h) that extends from the disc cover. Procedure and caution for reassembly 1) Reinstall the disc cover so that the hinge 1 of side case-R fits into portion 2 at the inside top of disc cover, and that the cover is not inclined. Installing and inclined disc cover could damage the switch inside the disc cover. 2) Pass the flat cable extending from the disc cover through the gap between the frame and side case-R, and then connect it to the MAN-H/MAN circuit board (f). (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) Disc cover Space sheet Opening for operating lock arm Lock arm AEL-H/AEL circuit board MAN-H/MAN circuit board Card slot cover (h) Flat cable (i) Hinge of side case-R (j) Frame (k) Side case-R (m)Loader (n) Disc drive unit 1) (b) (d) (c) 2) (c) (a) (e) (i) 2 (f) 1 6) 3) (h) (1) (1) (a) (2) 4) (g) (1) Unloc (2)Pull Fig. 5-3-11 Left Side [F] M1.6x2.5 (Black) Correct Incorrect Incorrect 5) [F] 5) [F] (j) (n) (m) (f) Installing and inclined disc cover could damage the switch in side the disc cover. (i) (h) (a) (k) Fig. 5-3-12 Right Side 70 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Disc cover Switch k VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (10) USB Holder, USB-H/USB Circuit Board, Rear Cover, EVF Unit, and Hand Strap Note: Before replacing the EVF unit, always perform “(1) BL DET Check” in “6-4-11 EVF”. USB Holder (a) and USB-H/USB Circuit Board (b) 1) Remove one screw [F]. 2) Disconnect the USB-H/USB circuit board from MAN-H/MAN circuit board (h). 3) Remove the USB-H/USB circuit board from USB holder in the direction of the arrow. Rear Cover (c) and EVF Unit (d) 4) Remove the hand strap from side case-R (g). 5) Remove one screw [F] and one screw [A]. 6) Disconnect the three flat cables, and then remove the rear cover along with the EVF unit. 7) Remove one screw [A], and then remove the EVF unit. Hand Strap (e) 8) Remove screw [A], screw [D] and screw [M], and then remove the hand strap. (d) 5) [F] (c) 7) [A] (f) (e) 6) 8) [M] 6) 8) [D] 8) [A] 4) 5) [A] (g) [A] M1.7x4 (Black) [D] M1.7x4 (Black) [F] M1.6x2.5 (Black) 1) [F] [M] M1.7x3 (Black) (a) (b) (c) (d) (f) (g) (h) USB holder USB-H/USB Circuit Board Rear cover EVF unit Hand strap plate Side case-R MAN-H/MAN circuit board (h) (a) 2) (b) Fig. 5-3-13 71 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 3) VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC [G] M1.7x3 (Gold) (11) SHE-H Circuit Board and Accessory Shoe in VDR-M70 (a) (b) (c) (d) (b) [H] M1.6x2 (Gold) 1) Disconnect the SHE-H circuit board (a) from AEL-H circuit board (c). 2) Disconnect the GYR-H (d) circuit board from SHE-H circuit board. 3) Remove one screw [G], one screw [H], and then remove the SHE-H circuit board along with the accessory shoe (b). 4) Disconnect the SHE-H circuit board from accessory shoe. 2) (d) 3) [H] 4) 3) [G] SHE-H circuit board Accessory shoe AEL-H circuit board GYR-H circuit board (c) 1) (a) Fig. 5-3-14 (12) SHE Circuit Board in VDR-M50 2) (c) 1) Disconnect the SHE circuit board (a) from AEL circuit board (b). 2) Disconnect the GYR circuit board (c) from SHE circuit board. 3) Remove one screw [G], and then remove the SHE-H circuit board. [G] M1.7x3 (Gold) 3) [G] (a) SHE circuit board (b) AEL circuit board (c) GYR circuit board 1) (a) (b) Fig. 5-3-15 [H] M1.6x2 (Gold) (13) Accessory Shoe in VDR-M50 1) Remove one screw [H], and then remove the accessory shoe (a). (a) (a) Accessory shoe 1) [H] Fig. 5-3-16 72 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (14) AEL-H/AEL and MAN-H/MAN Circuit Boards Note: Before replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, always perform “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write”. 1) Disconnect the two flat cables. 2) Disconnect the DRF-H/DRF circuit board (c) from MAN-H/MAN circuit board (b). 3) Remove three screws [G]. 4) Remove the AEL-H/AEL circuit board (a) that is assembled with MAN-H/MAN circuit board in the direction of the arrow: It may be difficult to remove these circuit boards, since the heat sink rubbers (e) on MAN-H/MAN circuit board may stick to the frame (d). 5) Remove the AEL-H/AEL circuit board from MAN-H/MAN circuit board in the direction of the arrow. Note: Do not scratch the surface of IC2009 or IC2010: The surfaces of IC2009 or IC2010 are silicon substrate (silicon wafer) that is semi-conducting. Scratching them could cause fault in operation. Procedure and caution for reassembly 1) Be sure to paste the two heat sink rubbers (e) on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board: Neglecting to paste the heat sink rubber could cause a fault. 2) Connect the MAN-H/MAN circuit board and AEL-H/AEL circuit board, and then attach them to the frame. If the MAN-H/MAN and AEL-H/AEL circuit boards are attached to the frame independently, a connection fault could result. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (d) 2) (c) AEL-H/AEL circuit board MAN-H/MAN circuit board DRF-H/DRF circuit board Frame Heat sink rubbers 1) e (b) IC2010 IC2006 IC4106 e IC2009 IC4002 IC2010 3) [G] VDR-M70PP (a) (2) (1) Unloc (2) Pull (1) (b) [G] M1.7x3 (Gold) 5) 3) [G] 4) Fig. 5-3-17 73 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M50PP 3) [G] k VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (15) Camera Block 1) Remove two screws [F], and then remove the camera block (a). Procedure and caution for reassembly Fit the hook (c) of camera frame onto the square hole (d) in frame before tightening the screws. Note: Take great care when handling the camera block: The camera block contains the lens unit, which is a precision component. Subjecting the lens unit to any impact could result in a fault. (a) (b) (c) (d) Camera block Frame hook of camera frame square hole in frame (d) (c) (a) (b) 1) [F] 1) [F] VDR-M70 VDR-M50 (a) [F] M1.6x2.5 (Black) 1) [F] 1) [F] Fig. 5-3-18 (16) Link Bracket 1) Remove two screws [H], and then remove the link bracket (a). (a) Link bracket [H] M1.6x2 (Gold) (a) 1) [H] Fig. 5-3-19 74 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (17) Drive Block and Side Case-R 1) Remove five screws [F] and two screws [A], and then remove the drive block (a) from the side case-R (b). Note: Take great care when handling the drive block: The drive block contains the disc drive unit, which is a precision component. Do not subject the disc drive unit to any impact: Doing so could cause a fault. 1) [F] (a) Drive block (b) Side case-R 1) [F] (b) 1) [F] 1) [F] 1) [A] [A] M1.7x4 (Black) [F] M1.6x2.5 (Black) (a) Fig. 5-3-20 Left side 1) [A] 1) [F] Fig. 5-3-21 Bottom side 75 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (18) Loader, DRF-H/DRF Circuit Board, Disc Drive Unit, Lock Unit, and Frame Loader (a) 1) Remove two screws [L], and then remove the loader. DRF-H/DRF Circuit Board (b) and Disc Drive Unit (c) 2) Remove three screws [K]. 3) Disconnect the one flat cable. 4) Disconnect the DRF-H/DRF circuit board from DRV-R circuit board in disc drive unit. Lock Unit (d) and Frame (e) 5) Remove one screw [H], and then remove the lock unit. Note: The disc drive unit is a precision component: Take great care when handling it. Do not subject the disc drive unit to any impact: Doing so could cause a fault. Procedure and caution for reassembly Be sure to paste the heat sink rubber (f) on the frame: Neglecting to paste it could cause a fault. (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) Loader DRF-H/DRF circuit board Disc drive unit Lock unit Frame Heat sink rubber (a) (1) (c) (2) 2) [K] 1) [J] (1) Unlock (2) Pull (1) 4) (b) 3) 2) [K] 5) [H] (d) [H] M1.6x2 (Gold) (f) [J] M1.7x3 (Black) [K] M1.7x1.8 (Gold) (e) Fig. 5-3-22 76 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (19) Fulcrum Cover-U, Fulcrum Cover-B and Fulcrum Unit 1) Remove two screws [P], and then remove the fulcrum cover-U (a) and fulcrum cover-B (b) from the fulcrum unit (c). (a) Fulcrum cover-U (b) Fulcrum cover-B (c) Fulcrum unit (c) (b) (a) 1) [P] [P] M1.6x3 (Black) Fig. 5-3-23 (20) LCD Case-B and LCD Circuit Board (a) LCD Case-B (a) 1) Remove the LCD case-B in the direction of the arrow. LCD Circuit Board (b) 2) Disconnect the one flat cable. 3) Release the two tabs, and then remove the LCD circuit board. Be careful not to deform LCD frame (c) at this time. (c) 1) 2) 3) Tabs (b) (1) (a) LCD case-B (b) LCD circuit board (c) LCD frame (2) (1) Unlock (2) Pull (1) Fig. 5-3-24 LCD Case-B and LCD Circuit Board Note: 1) Do not remove the mirror sheet (d), light guide plate (e), diffusion sheet (f), prism sheets (g) or LCD panel (h) from the LCD frame (c). 2) If the mirror sheet, light guide plate, diffusion sheet, prism sheets or LCD panel becomes detached from the LCD frame, assemble them as shown in Fig. 5-3-25. (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) (c) (h) LCD frame Mirror sheet Light guide plate Diffusion sheet Prism sheets LCD panel (f) Silver surface (e) (g) (d) A B C A>B>C White surface Fig. 5-3-25 Assembling parts inside LCD frame 77 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (21) GYR-H Circuit Board, Lens Frame, Lens Unit, Cushion, Crystal Filter, CCD Image Sensor, and SEN-H Circuit Board in VDR-M70 GYR-H Circuit Board (a) 1) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the GYR-H circuit board. Lens Frame (b) 2) Remove one screw [D]. 3) Release the two tabs. 4) Remove the lens frame in the direction of the arrow. Lens Unit (c), Cushion (d) and Crystal Filter (e) 5) Remove two screws [L], and then remove the lens unit, cushion and crystal filter. CCD Image Sensor (f) and SEN-H Circuit Board (g) 6) Unsolder the fourteen points of CCD image sensor terminals on SEN-H circuit board. Note: 1) The lens unit, crystal filter and CCD image sensor are precision components: Take great care when handling them. Adherence of dust, foreign object, fingerprint, etc. to them, scratches or impact, could cause a fault. 2) Never use metal tweezers to handle the crystal filter: Doing so could cause a fault. Procedure and caution for reassembly 1) Take care with the orientation of crystal filter when assembling it: Incorrect orientation of the crystal filter could cause a fault. 2) When assembling the lens unit into lens frame, insert the flat cable (h) of lens unit inside the lens frame. (g) (f) 6) (c) (c) 5) [L] (h) (d) (e) (h) (b) 1) [D] 2) [D] (a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f) (g) (h) a b GYR-H circuit board Lens frame Lens unit Cushion Crystal filter CCD image sensor SEN-H circuit board Flat cable Color [D] M1.7x4 (Black) (a) [L] M1.7x5 (Silver) 4) (b) 3) Tabs Fig. 5-3-26 78 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Transparent a>b VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (22) GYR Circuit Board, Lens Frame, and Lens Unit in VDR-M50 Information: The VDR-M50 lens unit is set as a service component: It includes the parts equivalent to cushion rubber, crystal filter, CCD image sensor and SEN-H circuit board of VDRM70. (a) GYR circuit board (b) Lens frame (c) Lens unit 1) [D] (b) (a) GYR Circuit Board (a) 1) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the GYR circuit board. Lens Frame (b) and Lens Unit (c) 2) Remove two screws [D], and then remove the lens frame. 2) [D] [D] M1.7x4 (Black) (c) Fig. 5-3-27 Caution: 1) The lens unit is a precision component: Take great care when handling it. Do not allow any dust to adhere to it, and do not subject it to damage or impact: Doing so could cause a fault. 2) Do not disassemble the lens unit: Doing so could cause a fault. 79 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6 ADJUSTMENT 6.1. CREATING REFERENCE DATA The reference data is necessary for adjustment: The adjustment program will not operate normally without it. Before adjustment, be sure to create the reference data, using the same model (with normal camera block) as the one to be adjusted. See section 6-1-1 and subsequent sections for details. Information: 1) The reference data is used to reduce the difference between environments of servicing site and factory (color temperature of light box, etc.). Using the reference data will increase adjustment accuracy. 2) The reference data is usually created once for each model because it is recorded on hard disk drive (HDD) of PC with the adjustment program. However, creating reference data again is necessary in the following cases: a) When performing adjustment using a light box that is different from that used when the reference data was created. b) When performing maintenance of the light box used when creating the reference data (replacing light, etc.). c) When performing adjustment using a C12 light balancing filter that is different from that used when the reference data was created. d) When deleting the folder containing the adjustment program from HDD. 80 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.1.1. List of Jigs and Tools used when Creating Reference Data NEW Note:Create the data using the adjustment data downloaded from Intranet. Skylark connection jig VKF1872 Personal computer (PC) All of the following OS must operate normally on it.*1 OS: Windows 95/98/98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional/XP/NT4.0 C12 light balancing filter VKF1164LBB12 DSP-R jig VKF1873 Step-up rings (Diameter 37 mm) VKF1164TAR37 RS-232C cable (9-pin or 25-pin straight type) [Generally available] AV/S input/output or output cable [Accessory: EW12522] AC adapter/charger [Accessory] *2 Power cable for AC adapter/charger [Accessory] *2 Example DC power cord [Accessory: Parts No. EV11012] *1: The adjustment program used on DVD video camera/recorder is exclusively for Windows 95/98/98 Second Edition/Me/2000 Professional/XP/NT4.0: The program cannot be run on MS-DOS. *2: The part numbers of AC adapter/charger and power cable are different depending on the destination: Refer to the “Replacement Parts List” for the part numbers. 81 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.1.2. Power Supply and Materials for Creating Reference Data 1) DVD video camera/recorder that is the same model as the one to be adjusted and whose camera block is operating normally. Note: It is recommended that you use a brand-new unit of the same model when creating the reference data. If such a unit is not available, use the same model of the DVD video camera/recorder that is received from customer for repairing fault in disc drive that is other than in the camera block, and one where there is no problem in recording of camera image and the zoom is operating normally. 2) 3100 K light box (VFK1164TDVLB) 3) Color monitor (color TV with AV input jacks) 4) DC power supply for DSP-R jig (5 V/1 A) 5) DC power supply for Light box (12 V/2 A) 6.1.3. Connections when Creating Reference Data Connect the DVD video camera/recorder (for creating reference data), jigs and test equipment as shown in Fig. 6-1-1. Prohibition: Assemble the DVD video camera/recorder completely, and create reference data with only the adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 6-1-1). Do not attempt to create reference data with the DVD video camera/recorder disassembled: Doing so is very dangerous because the DVD video camera/recorder incorporates high-voltage circuits and a laser emitter block. 82 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Note: 1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to VDR-M70/ M50: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the VDR-M70/M50 could cause a fault. 2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up. HP LIGHT BOX COLOR MONITOR COLLIMAROR FRONT SECTION To VIDEO IN YEL CAMERA STAND ADJUSTMENT COVER AV/S INPUT/OUTPUT CABLE DC Power CORD To AC OUTLET TRIPOD DC POWER SUPPLY (12V/2A) RED SKYLARK CONNECTION JIG BLK DC POWER SUPPLY (5V/1A) RED GND (PIN 16) BLK POWER CABLE VFK0631 BLK PC RS-232C CABLE YEL DSP-R JIG SD RD (PIN 20) (PIN 18) WHT Fig. 6-1-1 Connections when Creating Reference Data 83 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.1.4. Setting when Creating Reference Data When the connections for creating reference data are complete, set the DVD video camera/recorder and test equipment as follows: 1) Make sure that no disc or card is inserted: Neither is necessary when creating reference data. 2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and quick mode switch to “OFF”: After that operate the DVD video camera/recorder while watching the LCD monitor screen. 3) Press the MENU button to display the menu screen. 4) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick. 5) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying reset will appear. 6) Use the joystick to choose “ENTER”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be executed. 7) Press the MENU button to restore the normal display. Information: The following table shows the menu status after the above settings: The settings for Date Setup are not shown in the table below, since they do not have any meaning when creating reference data. Item Setting Item LCD Setup Camera Functions Setup Program AE White Balance EIS Dig. Zoom Wind Cut Cinema Auto Auto On ×40 Off Off Recording Functions Setup VIDEO Mode Quality Input Source (*1) PHOTO Input Self Timer OSD Output FINE FINE CAMERA Field Off Off Brightness Color Level + + Initial Setup Beep Power Save Record LED Language On Off On English *1: Display only on models that have the line input function. 84 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Setting VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.1.5. Copy or Deleting Adjustment Program Information: The adjustment program also includes a program for creating reference data. (1) Copy 1) Start the PC. 2) Start Explorer and create a new folder in HDD of PC. The name “map04w” is recommended for the folder: If a folder with the same name exists, give the folder a similar name that is easily understandable. Note: Be sure to manage the adjustment programs for Windows and MS-DOS in different folders: Managing them in the same folder will interfere with adjustment. 3) Download the software for adjustment from web site to the map04w folder. (2) Deleting If it is necessary to delete the adjustment program from hard disk drive (HDD) of PC, delete the map04w folder that was created during storage. 6.1.6. Starting and Terminating Reference Data Creation Program Make sure that the connections are correct, the power switch on DVD video camera/recorder is set to “VIDEO”, and the DC power supply for DSP-R jig is turned on: The reference data creation program will not start unless the connections for creating reference data are correct, and the DVD video camera/recorder or DSP-R jig is powered. For subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen. Information: 1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name. 2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure. (1) Start 1) Start the PC. If the PC has already started, terminate all other applications. 2) Start Explorer, and double-click the “SETUPforMAP2004W.EXE” file in map04w folder to start the program. 3) Once the program has started, the COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen will appear. 85 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 4) Choose the communication port to which the RS-232C cable is connected, and then choose the radio button of corresponding port on COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen. 5) Click the OK button on the COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen, and then proceed with the MODEL SELECT screen. COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION COM PORT SETTING PORT Note: If the following dialogs appear, perform the troubleshooting below: 4 5 PORT 1 PORT 4 PORT 2 PORT 5 PORT 3 PORT 6 OK EXIT POWER OR CONNECTION ERROR dialog ERROR ! MAY OCCURE ON CABLE OR JIG OR CAMCORDER. POWER FAILURE OR CONNECTION ERROR! Copyright (C) HITACHI, Ltd 2003 OK COM PORT ERROR dialog ERROR ! COM PORT ERROR OK When the power or connection error dialog appears: A connection is incorrect or power is not turned on. Make sure that all connections are correct and that power is supplied to the reference data creating device or DSP-R interface jig. Clicking the OK button will finish the program: After solving the problem, restart the program. When the communication port error dialog appears: There was a mistake in selecting communication port. Check the communication port. Clicking the OK button will finish the program: Select the communication port again after restart. 86 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6) Choose the radio button of corresponding model name in MODEL SELECT screen. 7) Click the ENTER button in MODEL SELECT screen, and then proceed with the SETUP MENU screen. Refer to next item for subsequent operations. If there is an error in model selection, the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog will appear. Click the OK button, and then choose the correct model. MODEL SELECT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL SELECT ×××× ×××× ×××× Note: If the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog appears when the correct model has been chosen, obtain (download) the newest adjustment program, and then start over again. ×××× 6 7 EXIT ENTER CONNECTION (2) Termination SETUP MENU screen. 1) Click the RETURN button on MENU screen of program to return to the MODEL SELECT screen. 2) Click the EXIT button on the MODEL SELECT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SETUP MENU Matrix Information: If the PC does not accept any operation during work, or the reference data creating program does not work, perform the following procedure: 1) Set the power switch of reference data creating device to “OFF”. 2) Turn off the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig. 3) Simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt and Delete keys on PC keyboard to restart the PC. 4) After the PC restarts, set the power switch of reference data creating device to “VIDEO” and turn on the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig again. 5) Restart the reference data creating program. 87 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals White Balance White Balance Abs EXECUTE RETURN FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog ERROR ! File hundle error. [SYMBOL FILE] OK VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.1.7. Creating Reference Data Start the setup program referring to “6-1-6 Starting and Terminating Reference Data Creation Program”. For subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen. Information: It takes approx. 20 minutes to create reference data. The following shows the times required for each item: Matrix: Approx. 10 minutes White Balance: Approx. 10 minutes White Balance Abs: Approx. 30 seconds SETUP MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SETUP MENU 1 Matrix White Balance White Balance Abs Preparation: 1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen. 2) Prepare the C12 light balancing filter: Attach it during setup. Procedure: 1) Choose MATRIX on the SETUP MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on SETUP MENU screen to start setup. 3) The ATTACH THE FILTER dialog will appear during setup. Attach the C12 light balancing filter over the lens of DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK button in ATTACH THE FILTER dialog. 4) The REMOVE THE FILTER dialog will appear during setup. Remove the C12 light balancing filter from the lens of DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK button in REMOVE THE FILTER dialog. After that, the ATTACH THE FILTER dialog and REMOVE THE FILTER dialog may occasionally appear: Reattach the C12 light balancing filter and remove it each time. 5) When setup is complete, the SETUP FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the SETUP MENU screen. When setup is complete with the C12 light balancing filter attached, remove the C12 light balancing filter. 6) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the SETUP MENU screen. 7) Repeat steps 2)-5). 88 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 2 EXECUTE RETURN ATTACH THE FILTER dialog CHECK ! Attach The Filter. 3 OK REMOVE THE FILTER dialog CHECK ! Remove The Filter. 4 OK SETUP FINISHED dialog FINISHED SETUP FINISHED. 5 OK SETUP MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SETUP MENU Matrix White Balance 6 White Balance Abs 7 EXECUTE RETURN VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 8) Choose WHITE BALANCE ABS on the SETUP MENU screen. 9) Repeat steps 2)-5). 10) Click the RETURN button on SETUP MENU screen. 11) The ALL SETUP FINISH dialog will appear: Click the OK button to complete the creation of reference data. Note: Neither Matrix, White Balance nor White Balance Abs in SETUP MENU can be executed independently. Be sure to execute all items at the same time. If you click the RETURN button on the SETUP MENU screen with an unfinished item, the EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS dialog will appear. Click the OK button in EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS dialog, and then execute the unfinished items. EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS dialog CONTINUE EXECUTE OTHER ITEMS. OK 89 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals SETUP MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SETUP MENU Matrix White Balance 9 White Balance Abs 8 EXECUTE RETURN ALL SETUP FINISH dialog FINISHED ALL SETUP FINISHED. OK 11 10 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.2. 6.2.1. SETUPS FOR ADJUSTMENT Checking Reference Data Before starting adjustment, check whether it will be necessary to create the reference data or not, referring to the flowchart below: Have you ever performed adjustment of this model? No Yes Will you use the same PC as for past adjustment? No Does the “map04w” folder exist on HDD of PC with which you previously performed adjustment? No Create the reference data referring to section 6-1. Yes Yes Copy the “map04w” folder from the PC with which you performed adjustment. Will you use the same light box as for past adjustment? No Yes Did you perform maintenance on the light box after the last adjustment? Yes No Will you use the same C12 light balancing filteras for past adjustment? No Create the reference data referring to section 6-1. Yes It is not necessary to create the reference data. Fig. 6-2-1 6.2.2. List of Jigs and Tools for Adjustment This list is the same as when creating reference data: Refer to “6-1-1 List of Jigs and Tools when Creating Reference Data”. 90 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.2.3. 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) Test Equipment, Power Supply and Charts for Adjstment Color bar chart (VFK1164TDVCB) 3100 K light box (VFK1164TDVLB) Hunting chart Color monitor (color TV with AV input jacks) Oscilloscope Vectorscope Digital voltmeter Frequency counter DC power supply for DSP-R jig (5 V/1 A) 10) DC power supply for Light box (12 V/2 A) 6.2.4. Connections for Adjustment Connect the DVD video camera/recorder, jigs and test equipment as shown in the Fig. 6-2-4. Prohibition: Assemble the DVD video camera/recorder completely, and perform adjustment with only the adjustment cover removed (see Fig. 6-2-4). Do not attempt to perform any adjustment with the DVD video camera/recorder disassembled: Doing so is very dangerous because the DVD video camera/recorder incorporates high-voltage circuits and a laser emitter block. (1) Setting and disassembly of DVD video camera/recorder 1) Refer to “(1) Adjustment cover” in “5-3 Disassembly” for how to remove the adjustment cover. 2) Be sure to connect the video output of DVD video camera/recorder to the video input jack of color monitor, which is usually terminated by 75 ohm: If the video output is not terminated by 75 ohm, the video output value cannot be measured correctly. 91 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Note: 1) Always connect the Skylark connection jig before connecting the DC power cord to VDR-M70/ M50: Connecting the Skylark connection jig after powering the VDR-M70/M50 could cause a fault. 2) Connect the Skylark connection jig so that the lead wires from jig face up. OSCILLOSCOPE COLOR MONITOR HP LIGHT BOX Nothing VECTOR SCOPE CH1 CH2 TEL COLLIMAROR To VIDEO IN VECTOR SCOPE FRONT SECTION To OUTPUT CAMERA STAND To INPUT YEL ADJUSTMENT COVER AV/S INPUT/OUTPUT CABLE DC POWER SUPPLY (12V/2A) DC POWER CORD BLK RED TRIPOD SKYLARK CONNECTION JIG FREQUENCY COUNTER POWER CABLE DC POWER SUPPLY (5V/1A) RED LCD-HDD (PIN 9) GND (PIN 16) BLK To AC OUTLET VFK0631 BLK PC RS-232C CABLE YEL DSP-R JIG SD RD (PIN 20) (PIN 18) WHT Fig. 6-2-4 Connections for Adjustment 92 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.2.5. Settings for Adjustment When the connections for adjustment are complete, set the DVD video camera/recorder and test equipment as follows: (1) Setting the DVD video camera/recorder Information: This item is the same as when creating reference data. 1) Make sure that no disc or card is inserted: Neither is necessary when creating reference data. 2) Set the power switch to “VIDEO” and quick mode switch to “OFF”: After that operate the DVD video camera/recorder while watching the LCD monitor screen. 3) Press the MENU button to display the menu screen. 4) Use the joystick to choose “Initial Setup”, and then press the center of joystick. 5) Use the joystick to choose “Reset”, and then press the center of joystick: The screen for verifying reset will appear. 6) Use the joystick to choose “ENTER”, and then press the center of joystick: Reset will be executed. 7) Press the MENU button to restore the normal display. Information: The following table shows the menu status after the above settings: The settings for Date Setup are not shown in the table below, since they do not have any meaning when creating reference data. Item Setting Item LCD Setup Camera Functions Setup Program AE White Balance EIS Dig. Zoom Wind Cut Cinema Auto Auto On ×40 Off Off Recording Functions Setup VIDEO Mode Quality Input Source PHOTO Input Self Timer OSD Output Brightness Color Level + + Initial Setup Beep Power Save Record LED Language FINE FINE CAMERA Field Off Off 93 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Setting On Off On English VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (2) Setting test equipment The names of switches, etc. of test equipment may vary depending on the manufacturer and model. Some switches in addition to those shown below may have to be set: See the instruction manual of test equipment for details. 1) Oscilloscope a) Probe: 10:1 b) TIME/DIV: 10 or 20 µs (except where some other designation is given) c) VOLTS/DIV: Change depending on the measurement object d) TRIGGER SOURCE: CH1 (except where some other designation is given) e) AC/DC/GND: AC 2) Vectorscope a) SATURATION: 75% 94 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.2.6. Starting and Terminating Adjustment Program Make sure that the connections are correct, the power switch on DVD video camera/recorder is set to “VIDEO”, and the DC power supply for DSP-R jig is turned on. The adjustment program will not start unless the connections for adjustment are correct, and the DVD video camera/recorder or DSPR jig is powered. Information: 1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name. 2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure. (1) Start 1) Start the PC. If the PC has already started, terminate all other applications. 2) Start Explorer, and double-click the “MAP2004W.EXE” file in map04w folder to start the adjustment program. 3) Once the adjustment program has started, the COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen will appear. 4) Check the communication port to which the RS-232C cable is connected, and then choose the radio button of corresponding port on COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen. 5) Click the OK button on the COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen, and then proceed with the MODEL SELECT screen. Note: If the dialogs on right appear, perform the following troubleshooting: COMMUNICATION PORT SETTING screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION COM PORT SETTING PORT 4 5 When the communication port error dialog appears: There was a mistake in selecting communication port. Check the communication port. Clicking the OK button will finish the program: Select the communication port again after restart. 95 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals PORT 4 PORT 2 PORT 5 PORT 3 PORT 6 EXIT OK Copyright (C) HITACHI, Ltd 2003 POWER OR CONNECTION ERROR dialog ERROR ! When the power or connection error dialog appears: A connection is incorrect or power is not turned on. Make sure that all connections are correct and that power is supplied to the reference data creating device or DSP-R interface jig. Clicking the OK button will finish the program: After solving the problem, restart the program. PORT 1 MAY OCCURE ON CABLE OR JIG OR CAMCORDER. POWER FAILURE OR CONNECTION ERROR! OK COM PORT ERROR dialog ERROR ! COM PORT ERROR OK VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Information: When communications between the PC and DVD video camera/recorder are normal during adjustment, the word “CONNECTION” in status bar (bottom left) of each screen will flash. 6) Choose the radio button of corresponding model name in MODEL SELECT screen. 7) Click the ENTER button in MODEL SELECT screen, and then proceed with the ADJUST MENU screen. Start of the adjustment program is now complete. Refer to “6-3 Adjustment Procedure” for subsequent operations. If there is an error in model selection, the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog will appear. Click the OK button, and then choose the correct model. MODEL SELECT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL SELECT ×××× ×××× ×××× ×××× 6 7 ENTER EXIT CONNECTION ADJUST MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU Note: If the FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog appears when the correct model has been chosen, obtain (download) the newest adjustment program, and then start over again. DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN (2) Termination SPOT NOISE LCD 1) Click the RETURN button on MENU screen of adjustment program to return to the MODEL SELECT screen. 2) Click the EXIT button on the MODEL SELECT screen. EVF EXECUTE CONNECTION Information: If the PC does not accept any operation during work, or the reference data creating program does not work, perform the following procedure: 1) Set the power switch of reference data creating device to “OFF”. 2) Turn off the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig. 3) Simultaneously press the Ctrl, Alt and Delete keys on PC keyboard to restart the PC. 4) After the PC restarts, set the power switch of reference data creating device to “VIDEO” and turn on the DC power supply of DSP-R interface jig again. 5) Restart the reference data creating program. 96 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals FILE HANDLE ERROR dialog ERROR ! File hundle error. [SYMBOL FILE] OK RETURN VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.3. 6.3.1. LIST OF ADJUSTMENT ITEMS Adjustment Program Hierarchy Diagram Communication Port Setting Data Initialize Model Select FILE MENU Initial Data Write MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: × ××× ADJUST MENU Backup Data Write Initial Data Write DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE Original Data Backup AUTO FUCUS Refer to "4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write". AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN EXECUTE RETURN SPOT NOISE Backup Data Write LCD CONNECTION EVF VIDEO LEVEL EXECUTE Original Data Backup RETURN CONNECTION BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FOCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU LCD PLL LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU LCD CONTRAST-1 PLL CONTRAST LCD BRIGHT BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE LCD CONTRAST-2 EXECUTE RETURN LCD WHITE BALANCE CONNECTION MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU EVF BL Check EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU EVF PLL PLL CONTRAST EVF CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE EVF BRIGHT EXECUTE RETURN EVF WHTIE BALANCE CONNECTION Fig. 6-3-1 97 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.3.2. List of Adjustment Needed After Replacing Major Components Major Components MAN-H/MAN circuit board MAN-H/MAN circuit board(*1) (EEPROM backup data already (EEPROM data backup written) disabled)(*2) (*1) Item EVF unit(*3) LCD unit Initial Data Write Video Level Burst Level Sampling Pulse Autofocus Auto Iris Control Matrix Chroma Gain Spot Noise LCD PLL LCD Contrast-1(*4) LCD Bright(*4) LCD Contrast-2(*4) LCD White Balance EVF BL DET Check EVF PLL EVF Contrast EVF Bright EVF White Balance *1: Be sure to perform “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write” before replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit board. *2: “EEPROM data backup disabled” refers to when the backup of EEPROM data from the MAN-H/MAN circuit board to be replaced could not be properly executed due to some fault, such as VDR-M70/M50 not being turned on, etc. *3: When replacing the EVF unit, be sure to perform EVF backlight check between the replaced and new EVF units. *4: The following three items cannot be performed singly. Be sure to perform these adjustments as a set with the three items, and in the order stated: LCD contrast – 1 LCD bright LCD contrast – 2 98 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Item Lens unit [For VDRM70] Lens unit [For VDRM50] Major Components IC1001 IC1301 IC3701 IC6103 [For VDR- IC1302 M70] Initial Data Write Video Level Burst Level Sampling Pulse Autofocus Auto Iris Control Matrix Chroma Gain Spot Noise LCD PLL LCD Contrast-1(*4) LCD Bright(*4) LCD Contrast-2(*4) LCD White Balance EVF BL DET Check EVF PLL EVF Contrast EVF Bright EVF White Balance *4: The following three items cannot be performed singly. Be sure to perform these adjustments as a set with the three items, and in the order stated: LCD contrast – 1 LCD bright LCD contrast – 2 99 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.3.3. Purpose od Adjustments and Incompleted Phenomenon Item Initial Data Write Video Level Burst Level Sampling Pulse Autofocus Auto Iris Control Matrix Chroma Gain Spot Noise LCD PLL LCD Contrast-1 LCD Bright LCD Contrast-2 LCD White Balance EVF BL DET Check EVF PLL EVF Contrast EVF Bright EVF White Balance Purpose Incompleted Phenomenon To write initial data to EEPROM in which adjustment data has been stored To set the video output level. To set the burst level. To measure the delay time in sampling IC, and optimize pulse timing. To set out-of-focus correction level during zoom. To set iris control data. To compensate for unevenness in the chroma signal and input auto white balance control data. To set color saturation for the reference color temperature. To correct spot noise. To synchronize LCD image. To set the bright level and contrast of the LCD monitor. To check the characteristics of EVF backlight. To synchronize EVF image To set the bright level and contrast of the viewfinder. 100 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals -----------The picture becomes dark or whitish. Diagonal beats and horizontal noise occur. Focus is lost during zooming. It takes time until a subject is brought into focus, or correct focus is not obtained. The picture becomes too bright or dark. Color reproduction becomes defective. Color of the picture is denser or lighter than that of the subject. Spot noise occurs. Synchronization of LCD image is distorted. Color reproduction becomes defective of the LCD monitor. -----------Synchronization of EVF image is distorted. Color reproduction becomes defective of the viewfinder. VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4. ADJUSTMENT PROCEDURE Start the adjustment program referring to “6-2-6 Starting and Terminating Adjustment Program”. For the subsequent operation, operate the PC mouse while watching the PC monitor screen. Information: 1) Display ×××× on subsequent PC screen shows the model name. 2) The numbers on PC screens show the operational procedure. 6.4.1. Initial Data Write ADJUST MENU screen Note: 1) Write the initial data only after the MAN-H/MAN circuit board has been replaced when the backup of EEPROM data could not be performed using the MAN-H/MAN circuit board before replacement. Refer to “4-9-2 EEPROM data backup and write” for backup of EEPROM data. 2) Writing the initial data will initialize all the adjustment data in EEPROM. After writing, be sure to perform all the appropriate adjustments. Procedure: 1) Choose DATA INITIALIZE on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to proceed with the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. 3) Choose Initial Data Write on the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. 4) Click the EXECUTE button on DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen to start writing of initial data. The progress status can be confirmed using the PROGRESS STATUS dialog. 5) When writing is complete, the INITIALIZATION FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen. 6) Click the RETURN button on DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen to restore the ADJUST MENU screen, and then be sure to perform all the adjustment items. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU 1 DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION DATA INITIALIZE MENU screen Data Initialize FILE MENU 3 Initial Data Write Backup Data Write Original Data Backup 6 4 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION PROGRESS STATUS dialog DATA INITIALIZE PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT INITIALIZATION FINISHED dialog FINISHED FINISHED WRITING DATA OK 101 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.2. Video Level ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Preparations: 1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video out. 2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”. Procedure: 1) Choose VIDEO LEVEL on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to proceed with the VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level of waveform is 1.0 ± 0.05 Vp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase or decrease in level of waveform. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE 1 VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION VIDEO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 SAVE RETURN 1.0V ± 0.05Vp-p CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED Fig. 6-4-1 ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 102 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.3. Burst Level ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Preparations: 1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video out. 2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”. Procedure: 1) Choose BURST LEVEL on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to proceed with the BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that burst level of the waveform is 300mV ± 15 mVp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase or decrease in burst level. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL 1 BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION BURST LEVEL ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 300mV ± 15mVp-p SAVE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog Fig. 6-4-2 FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 103 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.4. Sampling Pulse ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Note: Start this adjustment after the circuit operation is stabilized, e.g., after leaving the DVD video camera/ recorder for at least one hour at normal temperature, and then starting within 90 seconds after turning it on. Unstable circuit operation will cause improper adjustment. MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE 1 AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN Preparation: Cap the lens of DVD video camera/recorder. Procedure: 1) Choose SAMPLING PULSE on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to start adjustment. 3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. 104 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 3 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.5. Autofocus ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Preparations: 1) Set the Hunting chart MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE 2) Set the zoom to telephoto end, and make sure that the center of Hunting chart appears. VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE 1 AUTO FUCUS Procedure: 1) Choose AUTO FOCUS on the adjustment menu screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to start adjustment. 3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. If the AF ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog appears, click the OK button in dialog, and then execute readjustment: If the AF adjustment error dialog still appears even after troubleshooting, the connection of lens unit may be incorrect or the unit may be faulty. AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 3 AF ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog ERROR Lens Adjustment Error OK 105 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.6. Auto Iris Control ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Preparation: Set zoom to wide-angle end, and point at light box without collimator and chart, filling the screen. Set the light box in front of camera. Procedure: 1) Choose AUTO IRIS CONTROL on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to start adjustment. The progress status can be confirmed using the PROGRESS STATUS dialog. 3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. If the IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog appears, click the OK button in dialog, perform the appropriate corrective action, and then perform readjustment. If the IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog still appears after the corrective action, the lens unit may be faulty: a) Perform adjustment in a place where no surrounding light will affect the adjustment. MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 RETURN PROGRESS STATUS dialog AUTO IRIS CONTROL PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 3 IRIS ADJUSTMENT ERROR dialog Iris Adjustment Error OK Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals EXECUTE CONNECTION ERROR 106 1 MATRIX VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.7. Matrix ADJUST MENU screen Preparation: 1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen. 2) Prepare the C12 light balancing filter: Attach it during adjustment. Procedure: 1) Choose MATRIX on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to start adjustment. The progress status can be confirmed using the PROGRESS STATUS dialog. 3) The ATTACH THE FILTER dialog will appear during setup. Attach the C12 light balancing filter over the lens of DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK button in ATTACH THE FILTER dialog. 4) The REMOVE THE FILTER dialog will appear during setup. Remove the C12 light balancing filter from the lens of DVD video camera/recorder, and then click the OK button in REMOVE THE FILTER dialog. After that, the ATTACH THE FILTER dialog and REMOVE THE FILTER dialog may occasionally appear: Reattach the C12 light balancing filter and remove it each time. 5) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL 1 MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE CONNECTION PROGRESS STATUS dialog MATRIX PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT ATTACH THE FILTER dialog CHECK ! Attach The Filter. 3 OK REMOVE THE FILTER dialog CHECK ! Remove The Filter. 4 OK ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 107 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals RETURN 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.8. Chroma Gain Preparation: 1) Point at light box without chart, filling the screen. 2) Prepare the color bar chart: Use it during adjustment. Procedure: 1) Press the MENU button on DVD video camera/recorder, and use the joystick to specify “White Bal.: Set” to display the white balance screen. (See Fig. 6-4-4) 2) Press the center button on joystick: The “ ” mark on the white balance setting screen will blink. Hold down the button until the “ ” mark changes to a steady light. 3) Press the STOP button on DVD video camera/recorder. 4) Insert the color bar chart into light box and point the DVD video camera/recorder at the chart so that it fills the screen. Set EXIT Fig. 6-4-4 White balance set screen 5) Choose CHROMA GAIN on the ADJUST MENU screen. 6) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to proceed with the CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT screen. ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX 5 CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 6 CONNECTION 108 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals EXECUTE RETURN VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 7) Click the GAIN UP or GAIN DOWN button in ROUGH ADJUSTMENT box so that the value of red vector or red level approaches that in Table 6-4-1. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking the increase or decrease of vector or level. 8) Click the GAIN UP or GAIN DOWN button in FINE ADJUSTMENT box so that the value of red vector or red level matches that in Table 6-4-1. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase or decrease in vector or level. 9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the ADJUST MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 10) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. 11) Press the MENU button on DVD video camera/recorder, and use the joystick to specify (return to) “White Bal.: Auto”. Table 6-4-1 Value of Red Level/Vector Model When using a vectorscope VDR-M70 VDR-M50 A = 260 % ± 5 % A = 260 % ± 5 % RED BURST 270% ± 5% 100% Fig. 6-4-5 When using a vectorscope 109 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION CHROMA GAIN ADJUSTMENT FINE ADJUSTMENT ROUGH ADJUSTMENT GAIN UP GAIN UP GAIN DOWN GAIN DOWN 8 7 9 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 10 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.9. Spot Noise p Information: 1) The SPOT NOISE adjustment compensates for bright points that appear on the screen, and these are caused by a defect in pixel of CCD (image sensor) that may occur when DVD video camera/ recorder is used under particular conditions or for a long time. Therefore, execute SPOT NOISE only in the following cases: a) Pixel defect occurs in CCD and a bright point appears on screen, b) Lens unit (CCD) is replaced c) “Data Initialize” is executed 2) The presence or absence of a bright point that appears on screen due to pixel defect on CCD can easily be judged by capping the lens. Use a CRT color monitor for this check. Procedure: 1) Choose SPOT NOISE on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to start adjustment. When SPOT NOISE starts, the DVD video camera/ recorder will automatically turn on again. 3) When adjustment is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. If bright point still appears after adjustment is finished, the lens unit (CCD) may be faulty. ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN 1 SPOT NOISE LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 110 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 3 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.10. LCD Note: 1) Perform LCD only after replacing the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, LCD circuit board or LCD unit, or executing “Initial Data Write”. 2) Neither light box nor chart is needed for LCD adjustment. Before performing any adjustments for LCD, be sure to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the test mode using the procedure below, and then display the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU. Procedure: 1) Choose LCD on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the test mode. The progress status can be confirmed using the PROGRESS STATUS dialog. 3) When the DVD video camera/recorder has shifted to the test mode, the LCD screen will be black and white (see Fig. 6-4-7), and the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen will appear on the PC monitor screen. ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE 1 LCD EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION PROGRESS STATUS dialog LCD ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZE PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU Fig. 6-4-7 LCD Monitor Screen LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU PLL CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE EXECUTE CONNECTION 111 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals RETURN VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen (1) LCD PLL MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Preparation: Connect the frequency counter to “LCD-HDD (pin 9)” of Skylark Connection jig. Procedure: 1) Choose PLL on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the PLL ADJUSTMENT screen. Synchronization of the video on LCD monitor screen will be off at this time, and the image will flow. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the frequency is 15.625 kHz ± 0.1 kHz. Click the button at approx. 2second intervals while checking the variation of frequencies. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU 1 PLL CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION PLL ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION PLL ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 112 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen (2) LCD Contrast-1 MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Note: Be sure to adjust LCD brightness and LCD contrast-2 after completing LCD contrast-1 adjustment. LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU PLL Preparations: 1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of Skylark Connection jig. 2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is. Procedure 1) Choose CONTRAST on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level A of waveform is 1.75V ± 0.05Vp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase or decrease in level A. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 1 CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK A = 1.75V ± 0.05Vp-p Fig. 6-4-8 Waveform of LCD Contrast-1 Adjustment 113 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen (3) LCD Brightness Note: 1) Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-1 before performing LCD brightness adjustment. 2) Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-2 after completing LCD brightness adjustment. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU PLL CONTRAST Preparations: 1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of Skylark Connection jig. 2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is. Procedure: 1) Choose BRIGHT on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the BRIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level B of waveform is 2.6V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase or decrease in level B. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. WHITE BALANCE 2 EXECUTE BRIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION BLIGHT ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK B [After Adjustment] B = 2.6V ± 0.1Vp-p Fig. 6-4-9 Waveform of LCD Bright Adjustment 114 RETURN CONNECTION FINISHED [Before Adjustment] Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 1 BRIGHT 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen (4) LCD Contrast-2 MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Caution: Be sure to adjust LCD contrast-1 and LCD brightness LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU before performing LCD contrast-2 adjustment. LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU PLL Preparations: 1) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of Skylark Connection jig. 2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the TRRIGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is. Procedure 1) Choose CONTRAST on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that the value of level A of waveform is 2.00V ± 0.05Vp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase or decrease in level A. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 1 CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK A = 2.00V ± 0.05Vp-p Fig. 6-4-10 Waveform of LCD Contrast-2 Adjustment 115 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen (5) LCD White Balance MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Preparations: 1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “LCD-R (pin 3)” of Skylark Connection jig. LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU 2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “LCD-G (pin 5)” of Skylark Connection jig. PLL CONTRAST 3) Connect the oscilloscope EXT TRIG to video output. 4) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “ALT” and BRIGHT TRIGGER SOURCE to “EXT”. 5) Set the switches and knobs on oscilloscope so that the WHITE BALANCE CH1 and CH2 waveforms appear as shown in Fig. 6-411. 2 EXECUTE 1 RETURN Procedure 1) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP and DOWN buttons so that level a of CH1 waveform is equal to level b of CH2 waveform. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any CONNECTION SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT increase or decrease in level a. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT screen. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c and d of the waveform. 6) After step 5) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT button, and then proceed with the SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. c DOWN UP 3 4 NEXT RETURN CONNECTION SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT a DOWN UP 5 d b 6 Fig. 6-4-11 Waveform of LCD White Balance Adjustment 116 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals CONNECTION NEXT RETURN VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 7) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “LCD-B (pin 7)” of Skylark Connection jig. 8) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels a and b of the waveform. (See Fig. 6-4-11) 9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. 10) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c and d of the waveform. 11) After step 10) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. 12) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 13) Click the RETURN button in LCD ADJUSTMENT MENU to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 8 9 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 10 11 NEXT RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 117 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 12 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 6.4.11. EVF Note: 1) Perform EVF only after replacing IC3701 and its peripheral components, MAN-H/MAN circuit board or EVF unit, or executing “Initial Data Write”. 2) Neither light box nor chart is needed for EVF adjustment. Before performing any adjustments for EVF, be sure to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the test mode using the procedure below, and then display the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU. Procedure: 1) Choose EVF on the ADJUST MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on ADJUST MENU screen to shift the DVD video camera/recorder to the test mode. The progress status can be confirmed using the PROGRESS STATUS dialog. 3) When the DVD video camera/recorder has shifted to the test mode, the viewfinder screen will be black and white (see Fig. 6-4-12), and the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU will appear on the PC monitor screen. ADJUST MENU screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION MODEL NAME: ×××× ADJUST MENU DATA INITIALIZE VIDEO LEVEL BURST LEVEL SAMPLING PULSE AUTO FUCUS AUTO IRIS CONTROL MATRIX CHROMA GAIN SPOT NOISE LCD 1 EVF 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION PROGRESS STATUS dialog EVF ADJUSTMENT INITIALIZE PLEASE WAIT A MOMENT EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen Fig. 6-4-12 EVF Screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU PLL CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE EXECUTE CONNECTION 118 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals RETURN VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (1) EVF BL DET Check Note: Be sure to take note of the resulting value of this check because the check value will be needed when EVF adjustment is completed. There are two types of EVF unit mounted in these VDR-M70/M50: The backlight characteristics of the two types are different. This check item identifies the type of EVF unit mounted (replaced). Procedure: 1) Connect the digital voltmeter to “BL-DET (pin 12)” of Skylark Connection jig. 2) Check whether the reading on digital voltmeter is 5 V or 0 V., and take note of the value. (2) EVF PLL EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen Preparations: 1) Connect oscilloscope CH-1 to EVF-RPD (pin 8) of the Skylark connection jig. 2) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH1” and TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1” Procedure: 1) Choose “PLL” on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the PLL ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button to flatten the waveform: Click the button at intervals of approx. 2 seconds while observing the movement of waveform. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU 1 PLL CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION PLL ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION PLL ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog Fig. 6-4-13 Waveform of EVF PLL Adjustment FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK 119 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (3) EVF Contrast EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen Preparations: 1) Confirm the CH1 connection to video out. 2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of Skylark Connection jig. 3) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2”: Leave the TRIGGER SOURCE in “CH1” as is. Procedure: 1) Choose CONTRAST on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level A of the waveform is 2.2V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase or decrease in level A. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU PLL 1 CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. A = 2.2V ± 0.1Vp-p OK Fig. 6-4-14 Waveform of EVF Contrast Adjustment 120 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC (4) EVF Brightness EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen Preparations: 1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to video output. 2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of Skylark Connection jig. 3) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “CH2” and TRIGGER SOURCE to “CH1”. Procedure: 1) Choose BRIGHT on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the BRIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP or DOWN button so that level B of the waveform is 3.7V ± 0.1Vp-p. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking any increase or decrease in level B. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) When save is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in dialog to restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU PLL CONTRAST 1 BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE 2 EXECUTE RETURN CONNECTION BRIGHT ADJUSTMENT screen MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION BLIGHT ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION B = 3.7V ± 0.1Vp-p ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK Fig. 6-4-15 Waveform of EVF Bright Adjustment 121 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen (5) EVF White Balance MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION Preparations: 1) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “EVF-R (pin 2)” of Skylark Connection jig. 2) Connect the oscilloscope CH2 to “EVF-G (pin 4)” of Skylark Connection jig. 3) Connect the oscilloscope EXT TRIG to video output. 4) Switch the oscilloscope V-MODE to “ALT” and TRIGGER SOURCE to “EXT”. 5) Set the switches and knobs on oscilloscope so that the CH1 and CH2 waveforms appear as shown in Fig. 6-416. Procedure: 1) Choose WHITE BALANCE on the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 2) Click the EXECUTE button on EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to proceed with the SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT screen. 3) Click the UP and DOWN buttons so that level a of CH1 waveform is equal to level b of CH2 waveform. Click the button at approx. 2-second intervals while checking increase or decrease level a. 4) After step 3) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT screen. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 5) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c and d of the waveform. 6) After step 5) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT button, and then proceed with the SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU PLL CONTRAST BRIGHT WHITE BALANCE 2 EXECUTE 1 RETURN CONNECTION SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SUB CONTRAST RED ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 3 4 NEXT RETURN CONNECTION SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SUB BRIGHT RED ADJUSTMENT DOWN UP 5 6 CONNECTION 122 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals NEXT RETURN VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 7) Connect the oscilloscope CH1 to “EVF-B (pin 6)” of Skylark Connection jig. 8) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels a and b of the waveform. SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SUB CONTRAST BLUE ADJUSTMENT 9) After step 8) is complete, be sure to click the NEXT button, and then proceed with the SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. 10) Use the same procedure as in step 3) to equalize levels c DOWN UP and d of the waveform. 11) After step 10) is complete, be sure to click the SAVE button and then proceed with the BL DET screen. Note that clicking the RETURN button will restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen to the status before the adjustment was performed. 12) Click either button on the BL DET screen according to the voltage checked in “(1) EVF BL DET Check”: “High” button when the check value is 5 V, or “Low” button when it is 0 V. 13) When BL DET is complete, the ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog will appear: Click the OK button in 8 9 SAVE RETURN CONNECTION SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION SUB BRIGHT BLUE ADJUSTMENT dialog to restore the EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU screen. 14) Click the RETURN button in EVF ADJUSTMENT MENU to restore the ADJUST MENU screen. DOWN UP 10 c 11 NEXT RETURN CONNECTION a BL DET screen. MANUAL ADJUSTMENT PROGRAM for SERVICE STATION BL DET Low High d 12 b CONNECTION ADJUSTMENT FINISHED dialog FINISHED ADJUSTMENT FINISHED. OK Fig. 6-4-16 Waveform of White Balance Adjustment 123 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 13 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 124 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 7 SCHEMATIC, CIRCUIT BOARD AND BLOCK DIAGRAMS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S Schematic & Wiring Diagrams S-1 VDR-M70 Wiring Diagram F CN0152 To ACCESSORY SHOE 6PIN MICROPHONE F 6PIN PG1401 FRT-H PG1802 GYR-H PG1801 10PIN CN3401 PG0154 E LENS UNIT 6PIN SHE-H MR PG0153 40PIN 22PIN 23PIN PG3403 25PIN PG3401 PG3402 22PIN EVF UNIT PG1301 CN8012 CN7004 PG7003 PG7009 24PIN 6PIN PG7008 LCD D E PG0151 25PIN SAF-H 6PIN AEL-H PG7002 FOR ADJUSTMENT LCD PANEL D PG7004 PG8012 PG8011 PG7001 DISC DRIVE UNIT LOCK UNIT 11PIN SWL2 SEN-H SIDE CASE-L 120PIN (OPERATION SWITCH) 16PIN C C PG1002 PG9404 51PIN 70PIN HDM 6PIN PG2001 PG9702 SLID MOTOR PG2301 PG1501 4PIN PG9403 PG2002 DRF-H B SPINDLE MOTOR DRV-R 15PIN PG9701 MAN-H PG2302 PG9404 12PIN PG0501 PG5001 BATTERY TERMINAL B PG1503 PG9103 J6002 MOD 8PIN PG1502 51PIN 70PIN EXTERNAL MICROPHONE JACK REAR COVER ZOOM/DISC EJECT/ REC BUTTON J6001 6PIN PG9301 PG9401 CN8101 M70EB/EG : AV OUTPUT JACK A DISC COVER M70GC : AV INPUT/OUTPUT JACK 20PIN JK8101 PC CONNECTION TERMINAL CARD INSERTION BLOCK/ POWER SWITCH/SPEAKER USB-H VDR-M70EB/EG/GC WIRING DIAGRAM 1 2 3 5 4 125 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 6 7 8 A VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 S-2 VDR-M50 Wiring Diagram MICROPHONE 6PIN F PG0153 F PG0154 6PIN 22PIN FRT PG1802 22PIN EVF UNIT SHE PG1401 PG1801 GYR 10PIN CN3401 LENS UNIT PG0151 6PIN E E MR 22PIN PG3403 40PIN PG1302 25PIN PG3402 CN8012 CN7004 PG7003 PG3401 PG7009 24PIN 6PIN PG7008 LCD 25PIN AEL SAF 6PIN PG7004 D D PG7002 FOR ADJUSTMENT LCD PANEL PG8012 PG8011 PG7001 DISC DRIVE UNIT 11PIN SWL2 LOCK UNIT 16PIN SIDE CASE-L (OPERATION SWITCH) 120PIN PG9404 C 51PIN C 70PIN HDM 6PIN PG2001 PG9702 SLID MOTOR PG2301 4PIN PG9403 PG2002 DRV-R SPINDLE MOTOR PG1501 15PIN DRF PG9701 MAN PG2302 B 12PIN PG0501 BATTERY TERMINAL B PG9404 PG5001 PG1503 PG9103 J6002 MOD 8PIN PG1502 51PIN 70PIN EXTERNAL MICROPHONE JACK REAR COVER ZOOM/DISC EJECT/ REC BUTTON J6001 6PIN PG9301 PG9401 CN8101 M50EB/EG : AV OUTPUT JACK M50GC : AV INPUT/OUTPUT JACK 20PIN JK8101 PC CONNECTION TERMINAL DISC COVER CARD INSERTION BLOCK/ POWER SWITCH/SPEAKER A USB A VDR-M50EB/EG/GC WIRING DIAGRAM 1 2 3 5 4 126 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 6 7 8 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1F 1 2 2F 3F 3 4 4F S-3 GYR-H/GYR 5F 5 6 6F 7F 7 8 8F S-4 FRT-H/FRT F F Model names "M70" and "M50" in the diagram include EG, EB and GC. 1E 2E 3E 1.3 1.3 0 3.1 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E E E To MICROPHONE 1D 1.3 2D 1.3 0 3.1 3D 4D 5D D To BTB [AEL-H/AEL] PG7003 6D 7D 8D D V_GYRO H_GYRO 2C 3C 4C REC INDI. 1C M70:To SHE-H PG0154 M50:To SHE PG0154 REMOTE CONT. RECEIVER 5C 6C 7C - 8C0 3.0 0 0 3.1 0 C (64) 3.1 1.3 1.3 C 5H 1.3 0 1.3 CODE LE 1ZS 64 MO DET 3.1 0 1B 1.3 0 1.3 1.3 1.3 0 2B 3B 4B 5B PART NAME 2SC5383T11 2SD2345-S DTC114TYE MA132WA (MO) 4.8 6BREC MODE ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR - 7B - (1ZS) 4.8 8B - (LE) GYR-H/GYR B B WB IR RECEIVER CODE PART NAME 5H XP4501 ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE 1A 2A FRT-H/FRT 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC GYR-H/GYR/FRT-H/FRT SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 1 2 3 5 4 127 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 6 7 8 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC S-5 DRF-H/DRF Schematic Diagram 1F 1 2F 2 3F 3 4F 4 5F 5 6F 6 7F 7 8F 8 S-5 DRF-H/DRF F F 1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 7E 6E 8E E E 1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D D D 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C C C 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B To DISC DRIVE UNIT (DRV-R PG9701) To MAN PG2002 B B 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A DRF-H/DRF A A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC DRF-H/DRF SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 1 2 3 5 4 128 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 6 7 8 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 129 (LF) 1 2 4.0 4.7 3 4 5 6 4.7 19C 1.3 (LF) 1.7 0.7 20C 4.0 2.2 2.2 (LF) (LF) SHE-H 4.0 2.3 21C 22C 1.6 23C A 24C 25C 0 26C 0 MIC AMP ( PB: REC: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3.1 0 27C 28C 29C 30C 1A (N2) 2A To MR CN3401 3A 4A 3.1 0 3.1 0 2.4 2.4 2.4 3.1 TL6101 5A 6A 4.0 2.2 2.2 1.3 TL6102 (LF) 1.6 (LF) (LF) B To BTB [AEL-H] PG7009 4.0 2.3 0.7 1.7 3.1 0 A/D & D/A CONV. 2.4 2.4 2.4 0 18 3C BTB 1C-3C 19 2C 20 21 22 23 1C 24 25 2.4 2.4 2.4 4.7 2.4 2.4 2.4 To BTB [AEL-H/AEL] PG7008 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC ( PB: 1.4 1.4 0.5 REC: 1.4 1.4 1.4 3.1 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 0 3.1 3.1 0.5 0 0 BTB 19C-43C 1B 0 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B (N2) To EVF UNIT (N5) 4C 4.8 3.2 4.8 C 4.1 0.1 0 6C (AE) 5C 31C 32C EVF_5V 33C 34C 35C PB: REC: 0.5 1.5 0.5 ( PB: REC: 0 (LF) 0.7 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C C0153 0.01 PB: 0 3.1 REC: 0 36C (MP) 1.5 ( 7C 1.5 1.0 1C ( 1.7 1.2 1.3 ( PB: REC: 3.5 37C 38C NECW008AT To GYR-H PG1401 8C 39C To EVF UNIT 9C D 0 1.2 1.7 0 1.4 0.6 40C 41C 42C 43C 4.8 0.6(0.4) NECW008AT 4.8 13C 0 PB: REC: 0 ( 2D 3D 2.5 4.3 0 3.1(0) 3.0 1.5 (LF) 4.8 1.0 2.9 1.6 1.6 0 1.5 0.7 To SHOE TERMINAL 3.1 (0) 0 0 0 1.6 2.2 NECW008AT - 0 2.4 1.0 1E 2E EVF_5V 4D 3E 0 1.3 0 4.0 1.2 0 1.5 NECW008AT 5D 0 3.5 0 3.5 0 3.5 0 6D 0 CODE AE LF N5 MP 5.6 PART NAM 2SB1424R 2SC5383-T1 RT1N144UMA133 MA8056-M ONE VOLTAGE:PB O 1 3.5 2F 2 3.5 3F 3.2 0 S-8 SHE 3.5 135 1F 6E 0 S-7 SHE-H 5E 3.5 0 F 4E 3.2 3.5 0 3.2 0.1 (LF) 3.2 0.7 0 18C 3.1 0 4.0 0 3.2 0 LCD DRIVER 1.7 2.8 17C 0.5 1.0 1.3 4.8 1.3 1.2 0 131 16C 1.5 2.4 NECW008AT E 2.0 0 4.0 1.7 2.8 - - - 0 3.1 (LF) 0.7 1.5 1.5 3.2 0.1 1.6 1.5 15C CODE PART NAME 2SC5383-T11-1F LF RT1N144U-T11-1 N2 MA132K MI ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE 1.4 VIDOE/AUDIO AMP 1.4 14C 0 3.0(0) 1.3 1.5 0 PB: 1.3 NECW008AT REC: 1.2 1.6 1.1 PB: REC: 1.2 3.0(0) 0 3.4 ( 0 1.6 0.5 1.5 (LF) 4.8 2.0 1.2 3.0 ( 0.7 ( 4.8 1D PB: REC: 3.7 3.1 1.0 1.3 ( PB: REC: 2.2 3 4F 4 5F 5 6F 6 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals (MI) 1.5 3.2 3.2 0 12C (LF) 0.7 11C BTB 4C-18C ( 1.3 10C PB: REC: 0.4 AUD [AEL-H/AEL] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC AUD [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1F 1 2F 2 3F 3 4F 4 S-9 USB-H/USB 5F 5 6 6F 7F 7 8F 8 S-11 MR F F 3.2 0 1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 3.2 6E 7E 8E FLC181Z16SMMZ REVERSE SW REVERSE E E To MAN-H/MAN PG5001 PC TERMINAL USB-H/USB 1D 2D 3D To LCD PG3403 4D 3.2 5D 6D 7D 0 8D 3.2 OPEN/CLOSE SW D D ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C MR 7C 8C S-10 SAF-H/SAF C C 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B B B To SWL2 PG8012 To BTB [AEL-H/AEL] PG7004 SAF-H/SAF 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC USB-H/USB/SAF-H/SAF/MR SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 1 2 3 5 4 130 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 6 7 8 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 129 (LF) 1 2 4.0 4.7 3 4 5 6 4.7 19C 1.3 (LF) 1.7 0.7 20C 4.0 2.2 2.2 (LF) (LF) SHE-H 4.0 2.3 21C 22C 1.6 23C A 24C 25C 0 26C 0 MIC AMP ( PB: REC: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3.1 0 27C 28C 29C 30C 1A (N2) 2A To MR CN3401 3A 4A 3.1 0 3.1 0 2.4 2.4 2.4 3.1 TL6101 5A 6A 4.0 2.2 2.2 1.3 TL6102 (LF) 1.6 (LF) (LF) B To BTB [AEL-H] PG7009 4.0 2.3 0.7 1.7 3.1 0 A/D & D/A CONV. 2.4 2.4 2.4 0 18 3C BTB 1C-3C 19 2C 20 21 22 23 1C 24 25 2.4 2.4 2.4 4.7 2.4 2.4 2.4 To BTB [AEL-H/AEL] PG7008 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC ( PB: 1.4 1.4 0.5 REC: 1.4 1.4 1.4 3.1 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 0 3.1 3.1 0.5 0 0 BTB 19C-43C 1B 0 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B (N2) To EVF UNIT (N5) 4C 4.8 3.2 4.8 C 4.1 0.1 0 6C (AE) 5C 31C 32C EVF_5V 33C 34C 35C PB: REC: 0.5 1.5 0.5 ( PB: REC: 0 (LF) 0.7 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C C0153 0.01 PB: 0 3.1 REC: 0 36C (MP) 1.5 ( 7C 1.5 1.0 1C ( 1.7 1.2 1.3 ( PB: REC: 3.5 37C 38C NECW008AT To GYR-H PG1401 8C 39C To EVF UNIT 9C D 0 1.2 1.7 0 1.4 0.6 40C 41C 42C 43C 4.8 0.6(0.4) NECW008AT 4.8 13C 0 PB: REC: 0 ( 2D 3D 2.5 4.3 0 3.1(0) 3.0 1.5 (LF) 4.8 1.0 2.9 1.6 1.6 0 1.5 0.7 To SHOE TERMINAL 3.1 (0) 0 0 0 1.6 2.2 NECW008AT - 0 2.4 1.0 1E 2E EVF_5V 4D 3E 0 1.3 0 4.0 1.2 0 1.5 NECW008AT 5D 0 3.5 0 3.5 0 3.5 0 6D 0 CODE AE LF N5 MP 5.6 PART NAM 2SB1424R 2SC5383-T1 RT1N144UMA133 MA8056-M ONE VOLTAGE:PB O 1 3.5 2F 2 3.5 3F 3.2 0 S-8 SHE 3.5 135 1F 6E 0 S-7 SHE-H 5E 3.5 0 F 4E 3.2 3.5 0 3.2 0.1 (LF) 3.2 0.7 0 18C 3.1 0 4.0 0 3.2 0 LCD DRIVER 1.7 2.8 17C 0.5 1.0 1.3 4.8 1.3 1.2 0 131 16C 1.5 2.4 NECW008AT E 2.0 0 4.0 1.7 2.8 - - - 0 3.1 (LF) 0.7 1.5 1.5 3.2 0.1 1.6 1.5 15C CODE PART NAME 2SC5383-T11-1F LF RT1N144U-T11-1 N2 MA132K MI ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE 1.4 VIDOE/AUDIO AMP 1.4 14C 0 3.0(0) 1.3 1.5 0 PB: 1.3 NECW008AT REC: 1.2 1.6 1.1 PB: REC: 1.2 3.0(0) 0 3.4 ( 0 1.6 0.5 1.5 (LF) 4.8 2.0 1.2 3.0 ( 0.7 ( 4.8 1D PB: REC: 3.7 3.1 1.0 1.3 ( PB: REC: 2.2 3 4F 4 5F 5 6F 6 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals (MI) 1.5 3.2 3.2 0 12C (LF) 0.7 11C BTB 4C-18C ( 1.3 10C PB: REC: 0.4 AUD [AEL-H/AEL] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC AUD [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 0.068 0.22 C1333 R1303 Not 100k Provided 2.2 R1318 R1329 R1330 R1332 10k 47k 47k 27k 8.2k 27k 27k 39k 180k R1336 R1348 Not Not Provided Provided 10k 5.6k R1350 R1355 0 100 180 120 1 0.01 1F C1324 560p S-13 SEN-H 1 C1316 Provided M50 14.7 9.8 (LF) 2F 2E 2D 8.0 (AE) 5.1 0 (0 or 0.7) 7.2 M70:27k M50:39k R1364 2.2k Not Provided 2A 7A 8A 9A 10A 2 M70:47k M50:27k 10.5 7.5 2SC3930 18A 19A M70:47k M50:27k M70:100 M50:120 8.2 15A 14A 12A 13A M70:560p M50:0.068 7.4 8.0 1.2 4.8 0 0 0 M70 : 3.7 M50 : 3.1 1.3 M70:10k M50:8.2k 0 ( PB: 0 REC: 1.0 (1.4) 3.1 0 PB: 3.1 3.1 REC: 0 0 3.1 0 ( 0(0.5-2.7) 0 3.1 0 0 10.5 0 M70:0.01 M50:0.22 0 FOCUS/ZOOM IRIS DRIVE 5.1 2.2k 1.4 10.5 1.4 0.9 0 4F 1.0(0.2-2.6) 3.1 0 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 1.4 3A C1333 2.2 R1336 10k M50 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.9 0.1 1.0 2.8 3.1 0 17A 16A M70 : 3.7 M50 : 3.1 4 4 PB: 0 REC: ( PB: 0 REC: ( 4A 1A 2.8 1.5 (BQ) 5F 5E 15 0 -7 0 -7 5D 5C 5B 5A 132 CCD IMAGE SENSOR 32.0 10.0 R1348 5.6k M50 0 0 M70:100k M50:180k -7.0 0 0 1.4 0 5A 0 0 1.4 15.0 3 PB: 10.5 REC: 3 PB: 12.0 13.3 REC: 10.0 ( ( 3.1 0 To LENS UNIT 47/10 0 3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A R1350 M70:0 M50:180 2 PART NAME UN9212 0 2C 2SC3930 10.5 2B CODE 8B ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE 2A 2.5 (2.5 or 0.1) M70 M70 F PG1301 PG1302 Not Provided Not Provided Provided 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A Components marked * are different between M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and M50 [including EG, EB,GC] : Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the different components. M70 To LENS UNIT E D C B A M50 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 2.8 1.3 NJM2872AF285 3V REG 1.0 IC1303 4 4.8 or 0 1.4 1.4 0 0 4 4.8 0 4.8 B GND 11A 20A 1.4 1.8 (0.2-2.6) 21A 4.8 (4.8 or 0) 0 (0 or 3.1) 22A (N5) ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 134 7F 7E 7D 7C 7B 7 7 SEN-H 7A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, V Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals BTB 1A-22A LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL] 6 6 Components marked * are different between VDR-M70 and VDR-M50: Refer to the difference tables in diagrams for the different components. PART NAME 2SB1424R 2SC4617 2SC5383-T11-1F RT1N144U-T11-1 6F 0 CODE AE BQ LF N5 6E 6D 3 6C 6B 6A 1 6A 1.4 REG VSS 2 4.8 A 0 5 V+ 0.5 (0.2-2.6) IC1304 F DET 5 GND 3 0 2 0.5 (0.2-2.6) 10.5 4.8 5 1 (8B) 5 VCC F DET VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 5 6 6F 7F 7 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 1E ZD7002 8A 9A 10A Not Provided CODE PART NAME 2E RT1N144U-T11-1 N5 UMH9N H9 NDS336P 336 ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE 3E BM10696R R7065 BM10345R RD13UMB1 BM10696R 470k BM10696R R7061 220k BM10696R R7060 N5 BM10696R Q7002 336 BM10696R Q7001 0.01 F 7A BM10349R M50 C7021 BM10696R M70 BM10349R Components marked * are different between M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and M50 [including EG, EB,GC] : Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the different components. F 8 8F 1 2 3 5F 4 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 23 25 S-14 BTB [AEL-H/AEL] 4 4F To LCD PG3401 5 3 3F 22 2 2F 24 1 1F 11A 12A LENS DRIVE 1A-22A 13A 4E 5E 6E 7E 8E 14A 15A 16A 17A 18A 19A 20A FOR ADJUSTMENT 21A E E 22A 19C 20C 21C 22C 1D 2D 3D 4D 5D 6D 7D 8D 24C 4.6 0 1.2 4.6 NJM2872AF34 3V REG 25C 2.8 26C IC7002 5 28C 23C 30C REG D R7031 1k 27C 4 VSS 2 1 To FRT-H/FRT PG1801 D 29C 3 31C 32C 33C 34C 36C 37C 1C 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C 7C 8C To SAF-H/SAF CN7004 38C 39C 40C 41C 42C 11C TL7030 TL7028 4.8 0 C 5C 4.8 3.1 0 7C 0 8C 10C 1.7 9C 1.1(0) 12C 3.1 3.1 13C 0 0 C 6C 0 1.7 3.3 0 AUD 1C-43C 14C 15C 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B M/M 8B 16C 35C 17C 18C 1C 2C 3C 43C B M70 B 4C BM10345R 0 (336)7.4 C7021 0.01 M70 1A 2A 3A 7.1 4A 20B 21B 22B M70 : To SHE-H PG0151 M50 : To SHE PG0151 6.8 23B 0 5A 6A 7A (N5) 0 8A 24B 25B 26B 27B EVF 20B-33B 28B 29B 0 A 0 30B 0 31B To MAN-H/MAN PG1501 10B 11B 12B 13B 14B 15B 16B 17B 18B 19B 0 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 9B (H9) A 32B 0 0 33B EVF 10B-19B EVF 1B-9B BTB [AEL-H/AEL] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC BTB [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 1 2 3 5 4 133 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 6 7 8 0.068 0.22 C1333 R1303 Not 100k Provided 2.2 R1318 R1329 R1330 R1332 10k 47k 47k 27k 8.2k 27k 27k 39k 180k R1336 R1348 Not Not Provided Provided 10k 5.6k R1350 R1355 0 100 180 120 1 0.01 1F C1324 560p S-13 SEN-H 1 C1316 Provided M50 14.7 9.8 (LF) 2F 2E 2D 8.0 (AE) 5.1 0 (0 or 0.7) 7.2 M70:27k M50:39k R1364 2.2k Not Provided 2A 7A 8A 9A 10A 2 M70:47k M50:27k 10.5 7.5 2SC3930 18A 19A M70:47k M50:27k M70:100 M50:120 8.2 15A 14A 12A 13A M70:560p M50:0.068 7.4 8.0 1.2 4.8 0 0 0 M70 : 3.7 M50 : 3.1 1.3 M70:10k M50:8.2k 0 ( PB: 0 REC: 1.0 (1.4) 3.1 0 PB: 3.1 3.1 REC: 0 0 3.1 0 ( 0(0.5-2.7) 0 3.1 0 0 10.5 0 M70:0.01 M50:0.22 0 FOCUS/ZOOM IRIS DRIVE 5.1 2.2k 1.4 10.5 1.4 0.9 0 4F 1.0(0.2-2.6) 3.1 0 4E 4D 4C 4B 4A 1.4 3A C1333 2.2 R1336 10k M50 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.9 0.1 1.0 2.8 3.1 0 17A 16A M70 : 3.7 M50 : 3.1 4 4 PB: 0 REC: ( PB: 0 REC: ( 4A 1A 2.8 1.5 (BQ) 5F 5E 15 0 -7 0 -7 5D 5C 5B 5A 132 CCD IMAGE SENSOR 32.0 10.0 R1348 5.6k M50 0 0 M70:100k M50:180k -7.0 0 0 1.4 0 5A 0 0 1.4 15.0 3 PB: 10.5 REC: 3 PB: 12.0 13.3 REC: 10.0 ( ( 3.1 0 To LENS UNIT 47/10 0 3F 3E 3D 3C 3B 3A R1350 M70:0 M50:180 2 PART NAME UN9212 0 2C 2SC3930 10.5 2B CODE 8B ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE 2A 2.5 (2.5 or 0.1) M70 M70 F PG1301 PG1302 Not Provided Not Provided Provided 1E 1D 1C 1B 1A Components marked * are different between M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and M50 [including EG, EB,GC] : Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the different components. M70 To LENS UNIT E D C B A M50 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 2.8 1.3 NJM2872AF285 3V REG 1.0 IC1303 4 4.8 or 0 1.4 1.4 0 0 4 4.8 0 4.8 B GND 11A 20A 1.4 1.8 (0.2-2.6) 21A 4.8 (4.8 or 0) 0 (0 or 3.1) 22A (N5) ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 134 7F 7E 7D 7C 7B 7 7 SEN-H 7A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, V Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals BTB 1A-22A LENS DRIVE [AEL-H/AEL] 6 6 Components marked * are different between VDR-M70 and VDR-M50: Refer to the difference tables in diagrams for the different components. PART NAME 2SB1424R 2SC4617 2SC5383-T11-1F RT1N144U-T11-1 6F 0 CODE AE BQ LF N5 6E 6D 3 6C 6B 6A 1 6A 1.4 REG VSS 2 4.8 A 0 5 V+ 0.5 (0.2-2.6) IC1304 F DET 5 GND 3 0 2 0.5 (0.2-2.6) 10.5 4.8 5 1 (8B) 5 VCC F DET Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 129 (LF) 1 2 4.0 4.7 3 4 5 6 4.7 19C 1.3 (LF) 1.7 0.7 20C 4.0 2.2 2.2 (LF) (LF) SHE-H 4.0 2.3 21C 22C 1.6 23C A 24C 25C 0 26C 0 MIC AMP ( PB: REC: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 0 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 3.1 0 27C 28C 29C 30C 1A (N2) 2A To MR CN3401 3A 4A 3.1 0 3.1 0 2.4 2.4 2.4 3.1 TL6101 5A 6A 4.0 2.2 2.2 1.3 TL6102 (LF) 1.6 (LF) (LF) B To BTB [AEL-H] PG7009 4.0 2.3 0.7 1.7 3.1 0 A/D & D/A CONV. 2.4 2.4 2.4 0 18 3C BTB 1C-3C 19 2C 20 21 22 23 1C 24 25 2.4 2.4 2.4 4.7 2.4 2.4 2.4 To BTB [AEL-H/AEL] PG7008 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC ( PB: 1.4 1.4 0.5 REC: 1.4 1.4 1.4 3.1 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 1.4 0 3.1 3.1 0.5 0 0 BTB 19C-43C 1B 0 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B (N2) To EVF UNIT (N5) 4C 4.8 3.2 4.8 C 4.1 0.1 0 6C (AE) 5C 31C 32C EVF_5V 33C 34C 35C PB: REC: 0.5 1.5 0.5 ( PB: REC: 0 (LF) 0.7 2C 3C 4C 5C 6C C0153 0.01 PB: 0 3.1 REC: 0 36C (MP) 1.5 ( 7C 1.5 1.0 1C ( 1.7 1.2 1.3 ( PB: REC: 3.5 37C 38C NECW008AT To GYR-H PG1401 8C 39C To EVF UNIT 9C D 0 1.2 1.7 0 1.4 0.6 40C 41C 42C 43C 4.8 0.6(0.4) NECW008AT 4.8 13C 0 PB: REC: 0 ( 2D 3D 2.5 4.3 0 3.1(0) 3.0 1.5 (LF) 4.8 1.0 2.9 1.6 1.6 0 1.5 0.7 To SHOE TERMINAL 3.1 (0) 0 0 0 1.6 2.2 NECW008AT - 0 2.4 1.0 1E 2E EVF_5V 4D 3E 0 1.3 0 4.0 1.2 0 1.5 NECW008AT 5D 0 3.5 0 3.5 0 3.5 0 6D 0 CODE AE LF N5 MP 5.6 PART NAM 2SB1424R 2SC5383-T1 RT1N144UMA133 MA8056-M ONE VOLTAGE:PB O 1 3.5 2F 2 3.5 3F 3.2 0 S-8 SHE 3.5 135 1F 6E 0 S-7 SHE-H 5E 3.5 0 F 4E 3.2 3.5 0 3.2 0.1 (LF) 3.2 0.7 0 18C 3.1 0 4.0 0 3.2 0 LCD DRIVER 1.7 2.8 17C 0.5 1.0 1.3 4.8 1.3 1.2 0 131 16C 1.5 2.4 NECW008AT E 2.0 0 4.0 1.7 2.8 - - - 0 3.1 (LF) 0.7 1.5 1.5 3.2 0.1 1.6 1.5 15C CODE PART NAME 2SC5383-T11-1F LF RT1N144U-T11-1 N2 MA132K MI ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE TWO VOLTAGES:PB AND (REC) MODE 1.4 VIDOE/AUDIO AMP 1.4 14C 0 3.0(0) 1.3 1.5 0 PB: 1.3 NECW008AT REC: 1.2 1.6 1.1 PB: REC: 1.2 3.0(0) 0 3.4 ( 0 1.6 0.5 1.5 (LF) 4.8 2.0 1.2 3.0 ( 0.7 ( 4.8 1D PB: REC: 3.7 3.1 1.0 1.3 ( PB: REC: 2.2 3 4F 4 5F 5 6F 6 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals (MI) 1.5 3.2 3.2 0 12C (LF) 0.7 11C BTB 4C-18C ( 1.3 10C PB: REC: 0.4 AUD [AEL-H/AEL] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC AUD [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1 1F 2F 2 3F 3 4 4F 5 5F 6F 6 7 7F 8F 8 S-17 EVF [AEL-H/AEL] F F 1E 2E 3E 4E 5E 6E 7E 21B 4.3 4.3 8E 3.6 20B 0.1 E (N5) E 3.1 0 33B 1D 23B 2D 3D 4D 5D 4.2 8.8 1.5 0 1.4 1.5 8.8 0 1.5 0 0 2.0 - 6.4 6.5 0.8 0.8 3.0 2C 3.0 3C 0 4C 28B 27B 3.0 0 3.1 0 10B 3.0 0 3.1 0 3.0 0 3.1 0 11B 9B 8B 12B 6C 7C 8C 3.1 0 0 6B 0 14B 5B 4B 3B 25B 24B 0 3.0 3.2 0 0 3.1 3.1 BTB 1B-19B 15B 3.0 0 0 3.0 1.4 0 7B 13B 0 3.1 0 0 26B D 3.1 0 5C EVF DRIVER 0 C 8D 3.0 0 5.0 1.5 3.5 1C TL3701 (GND) 0 0 BTB 20B-33B 7D 0 3.0 D 6D 0 0 C 16B 3.1 0 17B 2B 3.1 0 18B 32B 1B 19B 1B 2B 3B 4B 5B 6B 7B 8B 22B 30B CODE N5 31B B 29B PART NAME RT1N144U-T11-1 B ONE VOLTAGE:PB OR REC MODE EVF [AEL-H/AEL] 1A 2A 3A 4A 5A 6A 7A 8A A A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC EVF [AEL-H/AEL] SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 1 2 3 5 4 136 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 6 7 8 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1 1F 2F 2 3 3F 4 4F S-18 SWL2 F F DISC NAVIGATION 1E 2E 3E 4E To SWL3-H/SWL3 PG8017 E SELECT E MENU 1D 2D 3D 4D D D STOP/EXIT 1C 2C 3C 4C C C To SIDE CASE-L 1B 2B 3B 4B L B UP B CENTER LOW R To SAF-H/SAF CN8012 1A JOYSTICK 2A SWL24A 3A A A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC SWL2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM 1 2 3 4 137 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MODE VCOREF 1 SYNC SEL FILTER 2 ATT SYNC PICTURE COM-DC +5V 36 Vcc2 2.5V COMLEVEL SEL LPF TRAP SUBCONTRAST 33 B OUT USERBRIGHT CONTRAST 32 GND LPF TRAP SUBSUB- CONTRAST CONT R CONT B RP IR GAMMA1 GAMMA2 SERIAL I/F SCK 7 FBB BOUT VCCCOM COMOUT GNDCOM FBCOM CSHO CSVO SHIN 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 SIG.C BLKL1 RMTL1 Buf -1 -2 SUBBRIGHT Buf R-BRT B-BRT CONT R-CONT SUB CNTRST RIN 53 CLAMP CNTRST GIN 54 CLAMP CNTRST BIN 55 POL W/B LIMITER CLAMP POL SW POL SW SUB BRIGHT COM BRIGHT COM DC 31 VD 29 XENB VGATE SDAT 8 30 GND SYNC IN 57 +3V 29 VDD VSEP IC 58 M FILTER GAMMA-2 GAMMA-1 GAMMA SYNC SEP BRT CONT R-BRT B-BRT GAMMA-1 GAMMA-2 SIG C V SEP SERIAL I/F XCLR 10 27 HDO PLL COUNTER VD 11 TEST1 61 TIMING GENERATOR VCK VST 37 36 35 34 52 CLAMP VM 29 MIX ATT -9dB BUFF S-DC 57 HO+ F.No HREF 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 H2 GND 27 A2 39 H1 MUTE LPF 24 EVR MUTE LPF 23 1/N 61 VCC SP DC SHIFT DC SHIFT MUTE MUTE DC SHIFT DC SHIFT VCC 2.2K 20 MUTE CTL 19 C2 46 3 4 5 2 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 3 13 14 15 13 EIR- SERIAL-PARARELLE DECORDER 6 7 8 9 VAMP 10 11 12 REG(B) 5 VB 4 CEXT 3 LGND 2 CLOSE 1 16 A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC IC BLOCK 5 4 138 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 14 EIR+ 48 OPEN 1/2VCC 2 15 VIR H5 VD 17 1 16 IRM+ IRIS LOGIC 18 64 1 17 PGND2 C1 47 VM SDATA 63 GND SP MUTE CTL EXT 62 MUTE 21 TC B 19 VSHT D/A CONVERTER & DRIVE CONTROL CH OUTPUT STAGE D1 45 60 CONT OUT 18 IRM- 44 VCC 22 59 21 CONT20 41 D2 43 VREF SP PGND A 22 CONT+ H4 B2 42 EVR 23 REFI H0 CH OUTPUT STAGE B1 40 PGND 24 REFO H3 LATCH 58 A1 38 26 EVR CTL 25 VREF 56 35 SCLK 55 B BPF GCA 3dB DOS B 36 37 28 DC HO- 30 VH+ BUFF C VH- 31 LPF DOS B 54 16 HR ATT -9dB 15dB 53 15 H.G. DOS W 14 VDD 15dB 51 IC1301 UPD168153 FOCUS/ZOOM/IRIS DRIVE 32 STB DV 13 33 GCA 3dB 15dB 50 12 OSC IN 49 11 GND IF DY C 10 VSS0 EN 38 HD 9 HD DWN 39 BLSW BLHD 8 BLHD XSTB 40 7 BLSW PCG 41 6 VDD0 VDD +3V 42 5 VDD2 HST 43 4 TEST3 WIDE 44 AND 3 SCLK HCK2 45 2 17 XSTH TEST8 HCK1 46 GND 1 DATA 24 LOAD 23 TEST5 22 TEST4 21 VSS1 20 RPD 19 VDD1 18 D 18 STH RESET 47 17 19 CKH2 EXT 48 16 RGT IC6103 AN2903FJQ-V VIDEO AMP SERIAL BUS I/F 15 21 TEST6 PD VCO GND1 64 14 24 DSG VCOADJ 25 GND 13 25 XSTV 20 CKH1 HGATE H-SKEN DET CLPIN 63 GND 12 26 STV 22 TEST7 HCNT H-PULSE CLP SPLK IN/EXT TEST2 62 26 POF D/A E 27 CKV2 23 XDSG HDIN 60 H.FILTER FRP VCO-ADJ COM-BRT R-CONT B-CONT BLKL1 RMTL1 COM DC HAFC PLL COUNTER L DECODER 28 VDO TEST1 9 VPAL2 VPIN B-CONT VDIN 59 FRP XCLP XSTBY SH1 SH2 SH3 SH4 VPAL1 28 CKV1 RESET 56 POL VCNT S/H SUB CNTRST CNTRST 30 ENB COM-BRT BRT BRIGHT 31 GND SUBSUBBRIGHT R BRIGHT B STD BLK REG Buf Buf 32 VSS2 POL USERBRIGHT S/H Buf NC 51 HUE COLOR CK D OSDOUT 50 VREG 52 +3V Vcc1 5 SEN 6 45 34 R OUT CLOCK GENERATOR PHASE COMPARATOR RPD 4 46 COM-DC VCO GND 3 47 VCC1 49 35 G OUT MATRIX HUE DL COLOR ATT E COMLEVEL ATT 48 F DA PICTUREGAIN PICTURE-FO SYNC SEP GND2 37 GOUT 38 FBG 39 ROUT 40 FBR 41 VCC2 42 IC3701 LV4149W EVF DRIVER SIGCENT PSIG OUT 43 DA OUT COMDC 44 COM OUT 45 COMREF 46 DA OUT G/Y 47 REF R/R-Y 48 Vcc1 +3V B/B-Y F SYNC IN IC3401 CXM3009TQ LCD DRIVER GND S-19 IC BLOCK 6 7 8 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C Circuit Board Diagrams C-1 GYR-H C-2 GYR PG1401 PG1401 GYR -SIDE AGYR-H -SIDE A- GYR -SIDE B- GYR-H -SIDE B- [PATTERN No.JD1175-3] [PATTERN No.JD1176-5] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC GYR-H/GYR CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 139 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-3 FRT-H C-4 FRT FRT -SIDE A- FRT-H -SIDE A- PD1801 PD1801 FRT-H -SIDE B- FRT -SIDE B- [PATTERN No.JD1176-5] [PATTERN No.JD1175-3] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC FRT-H/FRT CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 140 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-5 DRF-H/DRF C-6 SHE 36 BA1801 36 40 21 1 20 DRF-H -SIDE B- DRF-H -SIDE A- [PATTERN No.JD1176-4] SHE -SIDE A70 1 [PATTERN No.JD1175-3] 36 35 DRF -SIDE A- 35 1 36 70 DRF -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1175-3] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC DRF-H/DRF/SHE CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 141 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals SHE -SIDE B- VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-7 SHE-H C-8 SWL2 CN0152 C0153 BA1801 SWL2 -SIDE A- SWL2 -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JA2255-1] SHE-H -SIDE B- SHE-H -SIDE A- [PATTERN No.JD1176-5] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC SHE-H/SWL2 CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 142 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-9 USB-H/USB C-10 MR CN3401 CN8101 USB-H -SIDE A- CN8101 USB-H -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1176-4] 5 1 USB -SIDE A- USB -SIDE B- MR [PATTERN No.JD1175-3] [PATTERN No.JA1183-2] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC USB-H/USB/MR CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 143 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-11 LCD 4 4C 3 3C 2 2C 1 1 1C C 1C 1C C C 4B 3 3B 2B 2B TL3418 2A 2A 2 3C C 4C 2B B 3B B 4B B B 1A A 3 4 C 1A A 4 2C C 1B 1 B B 3A 3 A 3 C 1B B B 4A A 2 2A 3A 4A 4A A A 1 1 LCD -SIDE A- 2 3 4 LCD -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JA2244-4] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC LCD CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 144 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-12 SEN-H C-13 SAF-H/SAF CN7004 IC1001 1 PG1002 14 7 CN8012 SAF-H -SIDE A- 8 SAF-H -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1176-5] SEN-H -SIDE A- CN7004 CN8012 SAF -SIDE A- SAF -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1175-3] SEN-H -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JD1176-5] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC SEN-H/SAF-H/SAF CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 145 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-14 AEL-H/AEL 4 4H 3 3H 2 1 2H 1 1H 1 H 2 1H 1 H H 2H 4 3H 4H H H R7031 H 3 4G 3G 3G 2G 1G G 1G 1G G G 4F 4 F 3F 3 F 2F 2 F 1F 1F F F 3E 3 E 2E 2E 1E E 20 4D D 3D 3 D 2D 21 1D 1D C7201 E D D 1 4C 3C 3C 2C 2C 40 1C 1C C C 4B 3B 2B B Components marked * are different between M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and M50 [including EG, EB,GC] : Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the different components. PG1301 Provided PG1302 Not Pro vided C1316 560p C1324 0.01 C1333 Not Pro vided C7021 0.01 R1303 100k R1318 10k R1329 47k R1330 47k R1332 27k R1336 Not Pro vided R1348 Not Pro vided R1350 0 R1355 100 R1364 2.2k R7060 220k R7061 470k BM10345R R7065 NDS336P Q7001 Q7002 RT1N144U-T11-1 RD13UMB-1 ZD7002 3A A 1F 1F 2A 2 A 2F 2F 4F 4F 60 1 F M50 Not Pro vided Provided 0.068 0.22 2.2 Not Pro vided 180k 8.2k 27k 27k 39k 10k 5.6k 180 120 Not Pro vided 120 61 1E 1E 2E 3E 3E 4E 4E TL3701 (GND) E E 1D D 2D 2D 3D 3 D 4 4D TL7041 D D Not Pro vided 1C 1 C 2C 2C 3 3C 4C TL6102 C C TL6101 2B 2B 3B 4B B B 1A 1A A A 3F 3 F F 1B B B 4A 4G G 1B B B 3G 3G G M70 4E E 2G 2A 2 A 3A TL3715 A 4A A TL7028 TL7030 4 3 2 1 1 AEL-H/AEL -SIDE A- 2 AEL-H/AEL -SIDE B- 3 4 [PATTERN No.JA2237-4] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC AEL-H/AEL CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 146 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-15 MAN-H/MAN 3.1 8.0 3.2 3.2 62 12 3.1 1 3.0 3.1 4.6 3.1 25 M70 : 15.0 M50: 12.0 31 3.1 56 TL6006 TL6009 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 3.2 TL6010 3.1 4.8 60 -7.0 7.9 TL2089 TL2090 7.9 TL2085 TL2084 TL2086 TL2095 TL2082 17 14 10 24 61 78 80 83 7.9 97 102 4.8 8.5 1 M70 120 M50 : 12.0 M70 : 15.0 3.0 3.1 4.8 8.0 If a fault is located on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, the entire circuit board must be replaced for servicing. If there is a fault in the DRV-R, MOD or HDM circuit board, the entire disc drive unit must be replaced, since these circuit boards are included in this unit. Because of this servicing method, this service manual does not include any schematic circuit diagrams. For circuit board diagrams, the manual includes the simple diagrams, which show only the information that is necessary for troubleshooting. TL2091 3.2 4.8 M50 : -7.0 M70 : -7.0 3.1 3.1 M50 M70 3.1 14 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 3.1 M70 : 3.4 M50 : 3.1 3.1 5.1 5.1 3.4 Components marked * are different between M70 [including EG, EB,GC] and M50 [including EG, EB,GC] : Refer to the difference tables in diagram for the different components. 3.2 3.2 3.1 3.1 TL1536 TL1534 3.1 TL0522 M70 (EG,EB) M70 (GC) IC2008 Provided PG2001 16PIN LINE INPUT Provided Not Provided FUNCTION M50 (EG,EB) M50 (GC) Not Provided 3.1 3.2 3.2 TL1535 3.1 3.1 3.2 10 3.1 M70 3.1 3.1 3.2 3.1 3.2 3.2 14PIN Not Provided Provided 3.2 3.2 Note: Voltage values are in REC status. Model names "M70" and "M50" shown for voltage values include (EG, EB) and (GC). TL0515 TL0504 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 TL0512 1 2.5 TL0511 70 TL0513 -7.9 -7.0 TL0510 7.9 2.5 2.5 2.5 TL1543 TL0517 TL1547 25 30 3.3 2.5 4.8 4.7 35 7.9 40 2.5 4.8 4.7 36 7.9 7.9 F0501 F0504 F0503 7.9 F0502 -7.9 TL0521(GND) TL0520 (GND) TL0518 MAN-H/MAN -SIDE A- MAN-H/MAN -SIDE B- [PATTERN No.JA2226-4] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC MAN-H/MAN CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 147 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 1,3 5,7 Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R, MOD and HDM Circuit Boards 3.1 M70 : 3.7 M50 : 3.1 12.0 2.5 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-16 DRV-R C-17 MOD Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R, MOD and HDM Circuit Boards If a fault is located on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, the entire circuit board must be replaced for servicing. If there is a fault in the DRV-R, MOD or HDM circuit board, the entire disc drive unit must be replaced, since these circuit boards are included in this unit. Because of this servicing method, this service manual does not include any schematic circuit diagrams. For circuit board diagrams, the manual includes the simple diagrams, which show only the information that is necessary for troubleshooting. Note: Voltage values are in reading status. Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated, set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup. Note: Voltage values are in reading status. Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated, set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup. 4.6 4.6 3.4 4.7 4.7 4.7 3.3 3.3 2.5 4.8 4.7 1 2 5 30 70 35 40 36 3.3 2.5 3.3 4.8 4.7 3.4 3.3 3.4 12 4.7 20 4.7 11 3.3 2.2 2.1 3.3 27 46 42 47 43 41 2.1 4.8 4.8 4.8 81 85 89 4.8 3.3 4.8 4.7 4.7 2.1 4.8 3.3 4.8 4.8 4.7 4.8 57 60 2.5 4.7 4.8 4.8 4.7 4.6 4.7 MOD -SIDE A- 4.7 4.8 4.8 4.8 8 11 2.5 4.8 3.3 4.6 4.7 4.7 MOD -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JA2238-3] 4.7 4.8 3.4 4.8 4.8 4.7 DRV-R -SIDE A- DRV-R -SIDE B[PATTERN No.JA2238-3] VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC DRV-R/MOD CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 148 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC C-18 HDM Note: Voltage values are in reading status. Example: 24 (4.7): Terminal no. (voltage value) Supplement: Since the DVD disc drive is intermittently operated, set to the reading status in which laser light is emitted from the pickup. 1 (4.8) HDM -SIDE A- Information of MAN-H/MAN,DRV-R, MOD and HDM Circuit Boards If a fault is located on the MAN-H/MAN circuit board, the entire circuit board must be replaced for servicing. If there is a fault in the DRV-R, MOD or HDM circuit board, the entire disc drive unit must be replaced, since these circuit boards are included in this unit. Because of this servicing method, this service manual does not include any schematic circuit diagrams. For circuit board diagrams, the manual includes the simple diagrams, which show only the information that is necessary for troubleshooting. HDM -SIDE B- 25 21 20 17 (4.9)(4.9)(4.9) (4.9) 17 16 27 26 25 (3.1) 32 1 14 (4.8) 3 (3.1) 5(4.9) 9(4.9) 11(3.1) 6(4.9) 10(4.9) 41(4.8) 40(4.8) 9 10 8 (4.9) VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC HDM CIRCUIT BOARD DIAGRAM 149 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B Block Diagrams B-1 Video/Audio Signal Process F M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] : PG1301 M50 [Including EG, EB, GC] : PG1302 F AEL-H/AEL SDO, SCLK, CS_LENS 38-40, 42 ZOOM MOTOR 16-18 2-4 FOCUS/ ZOOM/ IRIS DRIVE IRIS MOTOR 26 FOCUS LED E IC1503 IC1301 43, 45-47 FOCUS MOTOR SWL2 IC1303 F DET IC1302 1 6 Q1303 INV. TL7030 CS_LCD, SCLK, SDO LCD_OPEN TL0522 (REC) SYSTEM CONTROL P REM_IN 76 76 19 7 CS_LENS SD, MOVIE, STILL CS_LCD 7 7 LCD_OPEN 5 5 PG0152 IC1402 OPEN SW M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] IC1505 114 114 29-31, 39, 77, 87, 101 REAL TIME CLOCK 29-31, 39, 77, 87, 101 IC1507 IC1504 OSD EEPROM SDRAM IC2003 R, G, B CDS/AGC & A/D CON TL2084(V1) TL2085(V2) TL2086(V4) TL2095(V3) CAMERA DSP TL3715 (EVF-G) REM_IN 20 20 WB_IR MPEG2 CODEC IC6103 VIDEO/ADUIO AMP C SYSTEM MUX/DEMUX 35 38 Y 39 31 SENSOR H-DRIVE ATAPI IF USB IF AUDIO ACCELERATOR TL2089(H2) TL2090(H1) TL2091(RG) EVF UNIT PG7003 PG 1801 4 4 5 5 IC1801 REMOTE CONTROL RECEIVER D1801, Q1802 Q1803 WB IR RECEIVER REC INDI. PG1802 1, 10 1, 10 LPF 60 C LD1801, Q1801 50 CLAMP 59 IC1402 H_MOVE 53 12, 16 62, 64 2, 5 MIC FRT-H/ FRT CS_AUD, SCLK, SDI, SDO OPEN ONLY FOR M70 EB,EG M50 EB,EG PG2301 PG2002 46 CLAMP C 23, 24 D 6-8 VIDEO 44 44 IC1401 V_MOVE PG0153 7 7 IC2001 5, 6, 5, 6, 8-12 8-12 4 4 TALLY Y IC2002 GYRO DET EVF_R, EVF_G, EVF_B 33 33 42 42 SENSOR V-DRIVE Q1001 IC1001 BUF CCD 15 15 8 IMAGE SENSOR 19 19 34 34 ENCODER & D/A CONV 2 2 40, 43, 4, 37, 4, 37, 38 38 45 EVF DRIVER R_OUT, G_OUT, B_OUT IC2006 MAGIC TL2082 IC3701 6-8 53-55 GYR-H/GYR PG0154 PG1401 IC1403 17 17 H_GYRO CS_EVF, SCLK, SDO 21-23 21-23 IC2009 IC2010 SHE-H/SHE V_GYRO CS_AUD CS_LENS, CS_LCD, CS_AUD, CS_EVF, SCLK, SDI, SDO (CCD-OUT) MR IC3501 REVERSE SW ACCESSORY SHOE SHOE_SCLK, SHOE_SDATA, SHOE_DET CS_EVF 3, 4, 6-10 AEL-H/AEL 85, 86 85, 86 PG2302 AUD_OUT DRF-H/ DRF V_IN 0 ohm ACK0, ACK1, ACK2 24-27 USB-H/USB CN8101 PG5001 IC4106 IC5001 USB2.0 IF CONT JK8101 PC CONNECTION SD IF CONT 1-12 POWER SWITCH 19, 20 28, 91, 28, 91, 93 93 FLASH MEMORY SH SDRAM SH P 90 90 IC4002 MAIN CONTROL P PG1502 CARD INSERTION BLOCK M70 TL6006(AUD(L)) TL6009(AUD(R)) 89 89 J6002 AV INPUT/OUTPUT JACK DOORSW 16, 17 TL1535(SP_OUT-) TL1536(SP_OUT+) 2 IC6201 A/D & D/A CONV. 21-23 ADATAI ADATAO 18 20 D/A CONV A/D CONV 1, 2 9, 10 5, 6 3, 4 EXTMIC_LCH, IC6101 5, 1,14 MIC 10 AMP TL6101(MIC_INL) TL6102(MIC_INR) 57, 58 57, 58 EXTMIC_RCH 3, 4 J6001 EXT MIC JACK 54, 55 54, 55 15 B AUD_IN TL6010 (VIDEO) MOVIE, STILL MAN-H/MAN SPEAKER 4, 5 8 2 70 70 1 74 74 72 72 AUD_IO_L, AUD_IO_R : REC VIDEO : PB VIDEO A : EXT INPUT VIDEO C_OUT V_OUT Y_OUT VDR-M70PP/VDR-M50PP VIDEO/AUDIO SIGNAL PROCESS BLOCK DIAGRAM 3 4 5 150 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 1 1 24-26 24-26 TL1547 13 1 LCD_REV PG7009 PG0151 15, 16, 15, 16, 106 106 TALLY DOORSW DOOR SWITCH LCD 8 18 (T/W) EG, EB, GC] A LCD PANEL LCD_R, LCD_G, LCD_B WB_IR PG1002 PG2001 H1, H2, RG, V1-V4 3-5 33-35 LCD DRIVER PG3403 PG1401 R_OUT, G_OUT, B_OUT 75 75 PG3402 IC3401 6-8 5-7 19-21 12, 14, 44-46 10, 12, 14 16 H_GYRO (EJECT SW) DISC COVER PG7008 PG3401 V_GYRO ACCESSLE, PC-LED 7 REAR COVER B SELECT TL1543 DISC EJECT DISC DRIVE UNIT 2 2 SHOE_SCLK, SHOE_SDATA, SHOE_DET 3 ZOOM LEVER 1-4, 10-12 5 5 2 E 66 66 1 RECORD BUTTON SEN-H 5 2 LCD_REV 5, 6 ACCESS/PC IND. M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] 5 98 98 PG8011 67 67 PG1503 C 107 107 F_DET ZOOM SENSOR H1, H2, RG, V1-V4 SIDE CASE-L CN PG 8012 8012 PG CN 7004 7004 48 48 1 FOCUS SENS ZOOM SENS CCD IMAGE SENSOR FULL AUTO/ FOCUS/EXPOSURE BLC/DISPLAY/VOL. DISC NAVI./ MENU/STOP/ JOYSTICK 68 68 FOCUS SENSOR M50 [Including (KEY1) PWM SELECT FOCUS LED D SAF-H/ SAF PG1501 PG7001 IC0501 HALF_FV, IRIS OPEN, SHUT_CTRL 2 F DET ZOOM LED LENS UNIT MAN-H/MAN TL0504 (REG_ON) 38, 52, 38, 52, 69 69, 4-6 6 7 8 F B-2 Disc Drive 153 E D C B A Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals PG2302 PG9701 30-33, 38-41 30-33, 38-41 3V 25, 26 25, 26 3V PG9301 PG9401 3, 4 3, 4 7, 22, 23 IC9301 1 1 5V 5V 3V IC9501 M 28, 43 LOCK UNIT 28, 43 2.5V IC9603 IC9605 1, 3, 14, 16, 17, 32 IC9201 IC9302 AF IC9610 4 4 5 5 IC9001 IC9002 8 8 IC9006 IC9007 IC9353 IC9354 IC9417 MOD PG9103 PG9001 42, 43, 42, 43, 46, 47 46, 47 41 41 11, 12 11, 12 APC ANALOG FRONT END 5V 3V HDM 5V PG9702 5, 6 EJECT 5V SW DRV-R EJECT 5V LOCK UNIT 4 Encord Data DATA STROBE 4CH BRIDGE DRIVE SRAM 151 DISC DRIVE UNIT SPINDLE DRIVE 4 EJECT MOTOR DRIVE FLASH ROM 5V SW IC9306 8 4 IC9005 3 TR LASER DIODE LASER DIODE DRIVE 8 IC9305 8 IC9601 FRONT MONITOR DET. & AMP 3 8 IC9304 5 IC9506 8 DETECTOR & AMP DISC SW 15, 16 SLIDER MOTOR DISC COVER SW (Refer to POWER1) IC8501 5 6, 8 IC9503 8cm DVD-RAM/DVD-R DISC DRF-H/ DRF 3 16, 17, 32, 34, 44, 49, 64 SPINDLE MOTOR 30 IC9101 5 5V SW IC9602 2 2 11, 23, 50, 73, 82 57 IC9502 5 P 5 EEPROM DRIVE DSP (SERVO/DSP/ ATAPI/ ENCODER/ DECODER) SDRAM VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC POWER-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 6 6 PG2 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 B-3 Power-1 F PG0501 F0501 7 1-5 PG1501 PG7001 IC1502 6 SYS3V SYS3V BATTERY TERMINAL 3 8-12 12, 53-56 10 IC1503 Q1302 AF5V SW IC1505 IC1301 C3V REAR COVER AF+B 11 37, 48 103 103 1.6V REG E ZOOM LEVER/ RECORD BUTTON/ DISC EJECT C3V IC2006 PG1503 IC4106 L6305 81 81 (C3V) 3V SP3V 3V 14 5 IC4003 5 IC4005 LEN3V IC4006 34 61 FOCUS/ ZOOM/ IRIS DRIVE 33 22 LEN5V 30 L6303 22, 30, 36 3V IC4002 TL0511 4 L6301 78, 79 78, 79 TL0510(C1.6V) 9 IC6103 VIDEO/ AUDIO AMP IC1302 32 L6304 51, 54 C3V L6306 2 5 8 PG1502 POWER/ DOOR SW & CARD INSERTION BLOCK 11 IC1504 IC2009 3V 24 D MAN-H/ MAN DISC COVER M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] 2 13, 17, 18, 24, 27, 33, 40, 43, 44 6, 20 F DET IC1507 IC1304 1, 3 3V 5 REG IC2004 IC2010 5 1,3 OPEN ONLY FOR M50 [Including EG, EB, GC] IC5002 14 5 IC2008 3V C3V 14 IC2011 10, 17, 32, 42, 51, 57, 62 IC2001 3V 17 LENS UNIT 8 27, 28 27, 28 (B/U_3V) IC5001 IC6101 L6103 82, 82, 83 83 4 PG0153 10 10 3 3 19 5 MIC AMP C TL0518(C15V) 2, 5 M50 [Including EG, EB, GC] 3V IC0502 6 -7V 63 63 6 IC2002 0 ohm TRANSFORMER 15V OPEN ONLY FOR M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] 102 102 C8.5V 8.5V 12V CCD IMAGE SENSOR 5 -7V 1, 3 INV5V TL0512(CAM5V) M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] PG1001 IC1001 CCD IMAGE SENSOR 7 14 15V 5V SW 5V REG 3 IC7002 1 3V 5 21 5 REG 39, 47 C3V 18 IC3401 IC3701 IC1501 OPEN ONLY FOR M50 [Including EG, EB, GC] B PG3402 L3702 1, 49 L3701 11, 12 EVF DRIVER 3 L3403 36 L3401 43 IC1402 C H_MOVE VDD (8.5V) LCD DRIVER MR PG 3403 3, 4 Q3451 BACK LIGHT SW IC6001 V_MOVE LCD PANEL L3402 18, 29 16 10 3, 4 22, 23 9 17 C3V INV5V F0503 LCD 11 15 C8.5V 24, 24, 97 97 1 IC1401 IC1403 8 GYRO DET 3 LEN5V 119 119 0 ohm GYR-H/ GYR EVF5V VDD(8.5V) 1 1 C3V PG 7008 PG3401 L7303 12V PG 2001 EVF UNIT SHE-H/ SHE Q3701 EVF5V SW C5V 80 80 16, 20 LENS UNIT 20 20 Q7001, Q7002 HOT SHOE SW 2 SHOE_UNR M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] PG0154 CN1401 AF+B 3V REG ACCESSORY SHOE BA1804 30 30 TL7041 F0502 3V D CN0152 A/D & D/A CONV. M50 [Including EG, EB, GC] DECORDER PG7009 PG0151 BL6201 13, 14 BL6202 IC7001 LEN5V IC6201 3V FOCUS MOTOR/ ZOOM MOTOR/ IRIS MOTOR 3, 14 LEN3V 10,13,15, 19,25,31 PG 1302 F DET 8 9 IC2003 E M70 [Including EG, EB, GC] IC1303 C5V 2 FOCUS MOTOR/ ZOOM MOTOR/ IRIS MOTOR PG 1301 8 L6302 3V 3V REG PG7002 FOR ADJUSTMENT 19 B/U_3V B/U3V F 20 AF+B 10 SYS3V 36 C3V 10 10 IC3501 2 REVERSE B SW IC3502 1 OPEN/ CLOSE SW TL3418(INV5V) TL0517(D2.5V) 3 3 7 7 F0504 PG2002 PG2031 2.5V REG -7V 28, 43 28, 43 TL0513(D3V) TL0515(D5V) SEN-H 5V REG A IC0501 PG7003 PG1801 D1801, Q1802, Q1803 8 8 25, 26 25, 26 25, 26 25, 26 30-33, 30-33, 38-41 38-41 30-33, 30-33, 38-41 38-41 17 23 27, 52, 58, 59 AEL-H/ AEL PG2302 PG9701 28, 43 28, 43 2.5V DRF-H/ DRF WB IR RECEIVER 3V 5V DRV-R C3V (Refer to POWER2) 3 3 2 FRT-H/ FRT IC1801 REMOTE CONTROL RECEIVER A VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC POWER-1 BLOCK DIAGRAM 1 2 3 4 5 152 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals 6 7 8 F B-2 Disc Drive 153 E D C B A Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals PG2302 PG9701 30-33, 38-41 30-33, 38-41 3V 25, 26 25, 26 3V PG9301 PG9401 3, 4 3, 4 7, 22, 23 IC9301 1 1 5V 5V 3V IC9501 M 28, 43 LOCK UNIT 28, 43 2.5V IC9603 IC9605 1, 3, 14, 16, 17, 32 IC9201 IC9302 AF IC9610 4 4 5 5 IC9001 IC9002 8 8 IC9006 IC9007 IC9353 IC9354 IC9417 MOD PG9103 PG9001 42, 43, 42, 43, 46, 47 46, 47 41 41 11, 12 11, 12 APC ANALOG FRONT END 5V 3V HDM 5V PG9702 5, 6 EJECT 5V SW DRV-R EJECT 5V LOCK UNIT 4 Encord Data DATA STROBE 4CH BRIDGE DRIVE SRAM 151 DISC DRIVE UNIT SPINDLE DRIVE 4 EJECT MOTOR DRIVE FLASH ROM 5V SW IC9306 8 4 IC9005 3 TR LASER DIODE LASER DIODE DRIVE 8 IC9305 8 IC9601 FRONT MONITOR DET. & AMP 3 8 IC9304 5 IC9506 8 DETECTOR & AMP DISC SW 15, 16 SLIDER MOTOR DISC COVER SW (Refer to POWER1) IC8501 5 6, 8 IC9503 8cm DVD-RAM/DVD-R DISC DRF-H/ DRF 3 16, 17, 32, 34, 44, 49, 64 SPINDLE MOTOR 30 IC9101 5 5V SW IC9602 2 2 11, 23, 50, 73, 82 57 IC9502 5 P 5 EEPROM DRIVE DSP (SERVO/DSP/ ATAPI/ ENCODER/ DECODER) SDRAM VDR-M70EG/EB/GC, VDR-M50EG/EBGC POWER-2 BLOCK DIAGRAM 6 6 PG2 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 154 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 8 EXPLODED VIEWS 8.1. MAIN SECTION 155 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 156 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 8.2. LCD BLOCK SECTION 157 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 8.3. CAMERA LENS SECTION 8.3.1. For VDR-M70 8.3.2. For VDR-M50 158 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 8.4. EVF BLOCK SECTION 159 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 8.5. PACKING PARTS & ACCESSORIES SECTION 160 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 9 REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST 9.1. 9.1.1. Ref. No. MECHANICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST FRAME & CASING SECTION PARTS LIST Part No. Part Name & Description 1 JP40151 PWB ASSY FRT-H 1 JP40061 PWB ASSY FRT 2 JP40161 PWB ASSY GYR-H 2 JP40071 PWB ASSY GYR 3 JP40171 PWB ASSY USB-H 3 JP40081 PWB ASSY USB 4 JP40181 PWB ASSY DRF-H 4 JP40091 PWB ASSY DRF 5 JP40191 PWB ASSY SHE-H 5 JP40101 PWB ASSY SHE 6 JP40211 PWB ASSY SAF-H 6 JP40121 PWB ASSY SAF 7 JP40221 PWB ASSY SEN-H 9 9 9 9 10 JP40043 JP40044 JP40023 JP40024 JP39982 PWB PWB PWB PWB PWB 10 JP39981 PWB ASSY AEL 11 12 13 UA12512 JP40411 JP40481 DVD DRIVE ASSY(PC3RB) PWB ASSY LCD PWB ASSY MR 101 102 103 106 106 106 MC10581 MC10505 MC10591 EZ10846 EZ10843 QD28326 HEAT SINK HEAT SINK HEAT SINK TERMINAL,SHOE TERMINAL,SHOE SHOE,COLD 107 108 NJ13053 QD28995 HOLDER,USB CASE,FRONT ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY ASSY MAN-H MAN-H MAN MAN AEL-H Remarks (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70EG/EB VDR-M70GC VDR-M50EG/EB VDR-M50GC (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M70EG/EB VDR-M70GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC 161 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Ref. No. 108 Part No. Part Name & Description QD28991 CASE,FRONT 109 110 111 QX16741 GH10421 QX17202 COVER,MIC MICROPHONE COVER,LENS 111 QX17201 COVER,LENS 112 QX17231 HOOD ASSY 112 QX17241 HOOD ASSY 113 114 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 QX17211 QX17192 NA33681 NX25351 KX34312 QD28255 KX34141 MC10584 QD29472 QD28983 EZ10702 HP13758 COVER,JACK COVER,ADJUSTMENT FRAME,MECHA LOCK UNIT LOADER ASSY CASE,SIDE(R) BRACKET,LINK HEAT SINK COVER,DISC COVER,REAR TERMINAL,BATTERY LCD UNIT 125 HP13753 LCD UNIT 126 127 QD29034 QD29214 CASE,SIDE(L) COVER(L) 127 QD29212 COVER(L) 128 132 NA33711 NX24862 BRACKET(L) FULCRUM ASSY 132 133 135 NX24861 QD28143 QD28674 FULCRUM ASSY CASE,LCD(B) CASE,LCD(U) 135 QD28673 CASE,LCD(U) 139 140 MN19701 NX25032 SHEET,LCD(MR) FRAME,LENS 140 NX25621 FRAME,LENS 141 NX25882 COVER,FULCRUM(U) 141 NX25881 COVER,FULCRUM(U) 142 PH24892 COVER,FULCLUM(B) 142 143 144 145 149 PH24491 PV10431 MN20141 NX25711 NA34491 COVER,FULCLUM(B) STRAP,HAND SHEET,LCD SCREW,FILTER PLATE,USB B101 B102 B103 B104 B105 B106 B107 B108 B109 B110 B111 B112 B113 B114 MK13283 MK13283 MK13283 MK11992 MK11992 MK13491 MJ10281 MJ10281 MJ10281 MJ10281 MJ10281 MJ10281 MJ10281 MK11992 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW Remarks VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70EG/EB VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70EG/EB VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70GC VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Ref. No. B115 B116 B117 B118 B119 B120 B121 B122 B123 B124 B125 B126 B127 B128 B129 B130 B131 B132 B133 B134 B135 B136 B137 B138 B139 B140 B141 B142 B143 B144 B145 B146 B147 B148 B149 B150 B151 B152 B153 B154 B155 B156 B157 B158 B159 B160 B161 B162 B163 MK11992 MK13491 MK13491 MJ10281 MJ10281 7773852 MK13282 MK13282 MK13282 MK13282 MK13283 MK13283 7773852 MK13283 MK13282 MK13282 MJ10281 MK13283 MK13282 MK13283 MK13121 MK13283 MK13281 MK13282 MK13282 MK13283 MK13283 MK13282 MK13282 MK13282 MK12821 MK12821 MK13251 MK13251 MK13251 MK12071 MK13281 MK13282 MK12071 MK12071 MK12071 MK13281 MK13281 MK13285 MK13285 MK13285 MK13286 MK13286 MJ10281 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW B164 MJ10281 SCREW B165 MJ10281 SCREW B166 MK11911 SCREW B167 MK11911 SCREW B168 MJ10281 SCREW B169 MJ10281 SCREW B170 MJ10281 SCREW B171 MJ10281 SCREW 9.1.2. Ref. No. 601 Part No. Part Name & Description Remarks KQ11162 VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC Part Name & Description LENS ASSY Part No. HP13632 LENS ASSY 602 UE16642 SENSOR ASSY 603 MN19651 CUSHION 604 DT10561 CRYSTAL 9.1.3. CAMERA LENS SECTION PARTS LIST Part No. Ref. No. 601 Remarks VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC 162 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Part Name & Description Remarks VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC EVF SECTION PARTS LIST Ref. No. 401 402 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 411 412 Part No. Part Name & Description VEP28299D VWJ1624 VGQ7102 VGL1028 VGL1029 VGL1030 VGQ7099 VGQ7098 L5BDDXH00014 VGQ7095 VGQ7094 VGL1031 413 414 415 416 418 419 420 422 423 425 426 427 428 429 430 431 433 VGQ7360 VGQ7160 VMP7606 VMC1833 VGQ7358 VGQ7097 VGQ7159 VMP8034 VGQ7249 VGQ8013 VDL1388 VGQ7103 VDG1601 VGQ5726 VGQ7096 VGU9160 VMG1625 EVF C.B.A EVF FLEX BL PIECE EVF DIFFUSION SHEET EVF PRISM SHEET BL POLARIZED LIGHT PLATE LCD PRESS PIECE EVF BOTH SIDES TAPE EVF PANEL EVF MASK LCD HOLD PIECE LENS POLARIZED LIGHT PLATE EVF SHADING SHEET POLARIZED LIGHT PLATE EVF PLATE EVF CLICK SPRING EVF BARRIER SLIDE CASE HOLDER SLIDE PEACE EVF FRAME SLIDE SPACER EVF REINFORCEMENT PEACE EVF LENS LENS HOLDER GEAR OF VISIBILITY EVF VISIBILITY WASHER SLIDE CASE KNOB OF VISIBILITY EYE CAP B401 B402 B403 B404 B405 B406 B407 B408 VHD1393 VHD1393 VHD1532 VHD1606 VHD1606 VHD1542 VHD1572 VHD1572 SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW SCREW Remarks (RTL) VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 9.1.4. Ref. No. 801 PACKING PARTS & ACCESSORIES SECTION PARTS LIST Part No. VSK0631 Part Name & Description 9.2. ELECTRICAL REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST Remarks ADPTOR,AC 801 VSK0631-A ADPTOR,AC 802 EV10951 CORD,AC 802 EV10931 CORD,POWER 803 804 805 806 809 EW12522 EV11012 VEQ3993 EW12531 VQT0K94 809 VQT0K93 CORD,AVS CORD,DC REMOTE HAND SET CORD,USB OPERATING GUIDE (FRENCH/GERMAN) OPERATING GUIDE (UK) 809 VQT0K98 OPERATING GUIDE VDR-M70EG/EB VDR-M50EG/EB VDR-M70GC VDR-M50GC VDR-M70EG/GC VDR-M50EG/GC VDR-M70EB VDR-M50EB Ref. No. VDR-M70EG VDR-M50EG VDR-M70EB VDR-M50EB VDR-M70EG/GC VDR-M50EG/GC 811 828 829 QX16992 VFF0249 VQT0K95 830 VQT0K96 831 VQT0K97 833 EV11121 CAP,LENS CD-ROM OPERATING GUIDE (ITALY/DUTCH) OPERATING GUIDE (PORTUGUESE/SPANISH) OPERATING GUIDE (SWEDISH/DANISH) CORD,AC INLET (C) 834 EV11161 CORD,AC INLET (AU) 838 851 852 852 852 852 852 852 853 TS16755 SP18301 SG27481 SG27463 SG27465 SG27482 SG27464 SG27466 SU14111 SHOULDER BELT CUSHION CARTON BOX CARTON BOX CARTON BOX BOX,CARTON BOX,CARTON BOX,CARTON SOFT BAG VDR-M70EG VDR-M50EG VDR-M70EG VDR-M50EG VDR-M70EG VDR-M50EG VDR-M70GC VDR-M50GC VDR-M70GC VDR-M50GC VDR-M70EG VDR-M70EB VDR-M70GC VDR-M50EG VDR-M50EB VDR-M50GC 163 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Part No. Part Name & Description Remarks n JP40151 PWB ASSY FRT-H (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC n JP40061 PWB ASSY FRT (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC n JP40161 PWB ASSY GYR-H (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC n JP40071 PWB ASSY GYR (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC n JP40171 PWB ASSY USB-H VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC n JP40081 PWB ASSY USB VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC n JP40181 PWB ASSY DRF-H VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC n JP40091 PWB ASSY DRF VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC n JP40191 PWB ASSY SHE-H VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC n JP40101 PWB ASSY SHE VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC n JP40221 PWB ASSY SEN-H (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC n JP39982 PWB ASSY AEL-H (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC n JP39981 PWB ASSY AEL (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC n JP40411 PWB ASSY LCD (RTL) n JP40481 PWB ASSY MR VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Ref. No. Part No. Part Name & Description n JP40151 PWB ASSY FRT-H n JP40061 PWB ASSY FRT C1801 C1802 C1803 C1804 AA00968R AA00966R AA01126R AA01126R CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U C.CAPACITOR 10V 0.22U C.CAPACITOR 10V 0.22U D1802 MA132WA DIODE Remarks (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC MA3S132D IC1801 CE10291R SENSOR,REMOTE(RS-771) LD1801 CC12281R DIODE PD1801 PD410TN PHOTOB DIODE PG1801 EA14631R PG1802 EA13571R PLUG PLUG Q1801 Q1802 Q1803 DTC114YE B1ABDF000001 2SD2345-S TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR Q1803 2SD2345JSL TRANSISTOR R1801 R1803 R1805 R1806 R1807 R1811 R1813 R1814 0790033 0104084 0790071 0790046 0790041 AQ10344R 0790033 0790019 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP B1ABDF000001 VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC 2SD23450S VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 470 2.2M 330K 4.7K 1.8K 10M 470 47 n JP40161 PWB ASSY GYR-H n JP40071 PWB ASSY GYR C1401 C1402 C1403 C1404 C1405 C1406 C1407 C1408 C1409 C1410 C1411 C1412 C1413 AA00966R AA00966R 0893179 0893179 0893182 0893182 0893182 0893182 AA00966R AA00966R 0893213 0893213 AA01101R CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 2200P C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 2200P C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC IC1401 L2ES00000010 IC1402 L2ES00000011 IC1403 C0ABHA000049 IC IC IC Q1401 XP4501 TRANSISTOR-TRANSISTOR R1401 R1402 R1403 R1404 R1405 0790045 0790045 0790044 0790044 0790024 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W XP04501 3.9K 3.9K 3.3K 3.3K 100 164 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Ref. No. R1406 R1407 R1408 R1409 R1410 R1411 R1412 R1413 R1414 R1415 Part No. Part Name & Description 0790024 AQ00269R AQ00269R AQ00228R AQ00228R 0790072 0790072 0790037 0790037 0790051 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR n JP40171 PWB ASSY USB-H n JP40081 PWB ASSY USB CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 100 680K 680K 20K 20K 390K 390K 1.0K 1.0K 10K VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC BL8101 BE10134R COIL 180UH JK8101 EY11381R JACK,USB R8101 0790055 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 22K n JP40181 PWB ASSY DRF-H n JP40091 PWB ASSY DRF PG2301 EA13711R PG2302 EA13711R PLUG PLUG n JP40191 PWB ASSY SHE-H n JP40101 PWB ASSY SHE VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC BA1801 FS10961 BATTERY C0153 C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 0.01U 0893222 PG0151 EA13713R PG0153 EA13589R PG0154 EA13581R PLUG PLUG PLUG n JP40221 PWB ASSY SEN-H C1001 C1002 C1003 C1004 C1005 C1006 C1007 C1008 0893107 0893062 0893239 AA00699R 0893239 AD10484R 0893235 0893239 C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 5P C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 1U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 16V 10U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 10V 47U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 2200P C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 0.01U Q1001 Q1002 Q1003 2SC393000L 2SC393000L UN9212 TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR-RESISTOR R1001 R1002 R1003 R1005 R1006 R1007 0790044 0790024 0790015 0790041 0790052 0790051 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP Remarks VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W UNR9212 3.3K 100 22 1.8K 12K 10K VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Ref. No. Part No. Part Name & Description n JP39982 PWB ASSY AEL-H n JP39981 PWB ASSY AEL BL6201 BE10391R BL6202 BE10391R COIL COIL C1302 C1303 C1309 C1310 C1311 C1312 C1314 C1315 C1316 0893311 AA01111R 0893315 0893333 0893328 AA01111R 0893276 AA01111R 0893316 C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 220P CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 470P C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 25V 4700P CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 100P CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U CAPACITOR CH 50V 560P C1316 AA10873R CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.068U C1318 C1319 C1320 C1321 C1322 C1323 C1324 AA00951R AD10484R 0893333 AA01101R 0893133 0893133 0893333 C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 1.0U CAPACITOR CH 10V 47U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 330P C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 330P C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U C1324 AA10885R CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 0.22U C1325 C1331 C1332 C1333 0893333 AA01111R AA10872R AA01113R C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 2.2U C1334 C1350 C1351 C3701 C3702 C3703 C3705 C3706 C3707 C3708 C3709 C3710 C3711 C3712 C3713 C3715 C3716 C3717 C3718 C3720 C6101 C6102 C6103 C6104 C6105 C6106 C6107 C6108 C6109 C6110 C6111 C6112 C6113 C6114 C6115 C6116 AD10485R 0893333 AA10872R AA00968R AA00968R AA00422R 0893191 AA01121R AA01121R AA01121R AA01121R 0893193 AA10382R AA10382R 0893184 AA01111R AA01111R AA01111R AA00951R AA01111R AA10872R 0893354 0893358 0893278 AA01132R 0893354 AA10872R 0893278 0893358 AA01132R 0893331 0893331 AA00968R AA10885R 0893333 AA10885R CAPACITOR CH 10V 4.7U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 10U C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 6800P C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.47U C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.47U C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.47U C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.47U C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.022U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 1.0U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.033U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 150P C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 0.22U CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.015U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 150P CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.033U C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 0.22U CAPACITOR CH 25V 6800P CAPACITOR CH 25V 6800P CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 0.22U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 0.22U Remarks (RTL) VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC (RTL) VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC 165 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Ref. No. C6117 C6118 C6131 C6201 C6202 C6203 C6204 C6205 C6206 C6207 C6208 C6301 C6302 C6303 C6304 C6305 C6306 C6307 C6308 C6309 C6310 C6311 C6312 C6313 C6314 C6315 C6316 C6317 C6318 C6319 C6320 C6321 C6322 C6323 C6324 C6327 C6328 C6329 C6330 C6331 C6332 C6333 C6334 C6336 C7001 C7002 C7004 C7013 C7014 C7021 Part No. Part Name & Description 0893333 AA00968R AA00968R AA10382R AA10382R AA01132R AA01132R AA10382R AA10382R AA01113R AA00968R AA00966R AA01113R AA01113R AA10872R AA00968R AA01101R AA01101R AA01101R AA10872R 0893333 AD10484R AA00968R AA10382R AA10382R AA00966R 0893333 0893333 AD10278R AA00964R AA00968R AA00968R AA00964R AD10891R 0893333 AA10872R 0893333 AA00966R AD10483R AA10872R 0893333 0893333 AA10872R 0893333 0893333 AA10872R 0893347 AD10266R AD10266R 0893333 C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 0.22U C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 0.22U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 2.2U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 2.2U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 2.2U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U C.CAPACITOR 10V 1U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 10V 47U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 4V 100U C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 2.2U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U C.CAPACITOR 6.3V 2.2U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 100U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 33U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 10V 0.1U CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U E.CAPACITOR CH 4V 22U E.CAPACITOR CH 4V 22U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.01U C7022 C7023 C7024 AA10382R AA10382R 0893179 CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U D6301 IC1301 IC1302 IC1303 IC1304 IC3701 IC6101 IC6103 IC6201 IC7001 IC7002 MA132K CK46701U C0ABBA000145 CK40231R CK43972R CK45761U NJM2112V AN2903FJQ C0FBZJ000005 MB88347PFV CK43971R DIODE IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC IC L3701 L3702 L3703 L6103 L6301 L6302 BA10143R BA10143R BA10143R 0773006 BA10584R BA10577R COIL COIL COIL COIL COIL COIL 10UH 10UH 10UH 330UH 10UH 10UH Remarks VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC MA3S132K C0ABCB000027 C0FBZJ000005 C0FBBD000099 VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Ref. No. L6303 L6304 L6305 L6306 Part No. Part Name & Description BA10577R BA10577R BA10582R BA10577R COIL COIL COIL COIL PG1301 EA11694R PLUG PG1302 EA13589R PLUG PG7001 PG7002 PG7003 PG7004 PG7008 PG7009 EA13681R EA13851R EA14621R EA13571R EA14511R EA13703R PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG PLUG Q1301 Q1302 Q1303 Q1304 Q3701 Q3702 Q6101 Q6102 Q6103 Q6104 Q6105 Q6108 Q6109 Q6207 Q6208 Q7001 CA12502R 2SB1424 CA12891R 2SC4617 CA12911R CA12891R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R CA12781R CA12781R CA11341R TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR Q7002 CA12891R TRANSISTOR Q7009 UMH9NTN TRANSISTOR R1303 0790234 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 100K R1303 0790237 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 180K R1308 R1310 R1312 R1314 R1315 R1317 R1318 0790195 0790235 0790216 0790216 0790216 0790247 0790221 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR R1318 0790219 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 8.2K R1319 R1320 R1321 R1322 R1323 R1324 R1325 R1326 R1327 R1328 R1329 0790234 0790234 0790234 0790234 AQ00811R AQ00846R AQ00842R AQ00842R AQ00828R 0790195 0790229 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR R1329 0790226 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 27K R1330 0790229 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 47K R1330 0790226 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 27K R1332 0790226 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 27K R1332 0790228 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 39K R1333 R1334 0790209 0790221 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 1.5K RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 10K Remarks 10UH 10UH 47UH 10UH VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 120 120K 4.7K 4.7K 4.7K 1.0M 10K 100K 100K 100K 100K 12K 270K 180K 180K 56K 120 47K VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC 166 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals Ref. No. R1336 Part No. Part Name & Description 0790221 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 10K R1337 R1347 R1348 0790221 0790209 0790217 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 10K RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 1.5K RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 5.6K R1349 R1350 0790234 0790197 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 100K RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 180 R1355 0790194 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 100 R1355 0790195 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 120 R1364 0790212 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 2.2K R1370 R3701 R3703 R3704 R6101 R6102 R6103 R6104 R6105 R6106 R6107 R6108 R6109 R6110 R6111 R6112 R6113 R6114 R6115 R6116 R6117 R6118 R6119 R6120 R6121 R6122 R6123 R6124 R6125 R6126 R6127 R6128 R6129 R6130 R6131 R6132 R6133 R6148 R6157 R6201 R6202 R6205 R6206 R6207 R6208 R6209 R6301 R6302 R6304 R6306 R6307 R6308 R6309 R6310 R6311 R6312 R6313 R6314 R6316 0790216 0790221 0790225 0790216 AQ10747R AQ10747R 0790227 0790225 0790236 0790228 0790236 0790221 0790221 0790236 0790228 0790225 0790236 0790221 0790221 0790227 0790225 AQ10713R AQ10713R 0790227 0790217 0790223 0790207 AQ10713R AQ10761R 0790215 0790217 0790223 0790207 AQ10713R AQ10761R 0790215 0790216 AQ10712R AQ10712R 0790207 0790207 0790223 0790223 0790227 0790227 0790181 0790207 0790207 0790216 0790238 0790238 0790216 0790215 0790221 0790229 0790217 0790229 0790211 0790242 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 4.7K 10K 22K 4.7K 3.9K 3.9K 33K 22K 150K 39K 150K 10K 10K 150K 39K 22K 150K 10K 10K 33K 22K 100K 100K 33K 5.6K 15K 1.0K 100K 47K 3.9K 5.6K 15K 1.0K 100K 47K 3.9K 4.7K 10K 10K 1.0K 1.0K 15K 15K 33K 33K 10 1.0K 1.0K 4.7K 220K 220K 4.7K 3.9K 10K 47K 5.6K 47K 1.8K 390K Remarks VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M50 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Ref. No. R6317 R6318 R6319 R6324 R6325 R6326 R6327 R6328 R6330 R6450 R6451 R7009 R7010 R7011 R7012 R7013 R7014 R7016 R7018 R7021 R7022 R7023 R7024 R7026 R7031 R7038 R7049 R7050 R7051 R7052 R7053 R7054 R7055 R7056 R7057 R7058 R7060 Part No. Part Name & Description 0790202 0790202 0790211 0790229 0790216 0790181 0790209 0790181 0790221 0790214 0790214 0790181 0790181 0790181 0790181 0790181 BM10696R 0790181 BM10349R 0790201 0790201 0790201 0790024 0790194 0790207 0790207 0790207 0790207 0790181 0790181 BM10349R BM10696R BM10696R BM10696R BM10696R 0790181 0790068 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR COIL RESISTOR COIL RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR COIL COIL COIL COIL COIL RESISTOR RESISTOR R7061 0790073 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 470K R7065 BM10345R COIL R7089 R7090 BM10696R BM10696R COIL COIL CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W Remarks 390 390 1.8K 47K 4.7K 10 1.5K 10 10K 3.3K 3.3K 10 10 10 10 10 Ref. No. C3443 Part No. Part Name & Description 0893126 C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 100P D3401 D3451 MAZ80560ML MA3S13300L ZENNER DIODE DIODE IC3401 CK46211R IC L3401 L3402 L3403 BA10577R BA10577R BA10577R COIL 10UH COIL 10UH COIL 10UH LD3451 LD3452 LD3453 LD3454 LD3455 LD3456 B3AFB0000061 B3AFB0000061 B3AFB0000061 B3AFB0000061 B3AFB0000061 B3AFB0000061 LED LED LED LED LED LED CHIP 1/16W 10 CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 330 330 330 100 100 1.0K 1.0K 1.0K 1.0K 10 10 CHIP 1/16W 10 CHIP 1/16W 220K VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC SW7001 FB10471R SWITCH,TACT ZD7002 CC10574R DIODE VDR-M70 EG/EB/GC n JP40411 PWB ASSY LCD (RTL) C3401 C3402 C3403 C3404 C3405 C3406 C3407 C3408 C3409 C3410 C3412 C3413 C3414 C3415 C3417 C3418 C3419 C3420 C3421 C3441 0893193 0893193 0893193 AA00968R 0893219 AA00935R 0893179 0893179 0893179 0893179 0893179 AA00966R AA00933R 0893179 0893193 AA01111R AA00968R 0893179 0893179 0893126 C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V0.0068U C.CAPACITOR 10V 3.3U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 4.7U C.CAPACITOR CH 10V 1.5U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 25V 0.01U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 1.0U CAPACITOR CH 6.3V 10U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 16V 0.1U C.CAPACITOR CH 50V 100P 167 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals PG3401 EA11695R PG3402 EA13182R PG3403 EA10362R PLUG PLUG CONNECTOR Q3451 Q3452 Q3453 Q3454 Q3455 Q3456 Q3457 Q3458 2SB1424 CA12891R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R CA12502R TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR TRANSISTOR R3401 R3402 R3403 R3404 R3405 R3406 R3408 R3411 R3412 R3413 R3414 R3418 R3419 R3420 R3422 R3451 R3452 R3453 R3454 R3455 R3456 R3457 R3458 R3459 0790037 AQ00237R AQ00237R 0790051 0790064 0790064 0790037 0790037 0790037 0790037 0790037 0790011 0790011 0790011 0790077 0790059 0790037 0790044 0790017 0790017 0790017 0790017 0790017 0790017 RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR n JP40481 PWB ASSY MR CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1.0K 43K 43K 10K 100K 100K 1.0K 1.0K 1.0K 1.0K 1.0K 10 10 10 1M 47K 1.0K 3.3K 33 33 33 33 33 33 IC3501 DN8797MS IC3502 CK29741R HOLE IC IC n SWL2 PG8011 EA10504R PG8012 EA13581R PLUG PLUG R8011 R8012 R8013 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 1.5K RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 220 RESISTOR CHIP 1/16W 2.2K AQ00198R AQ00176R AQ00203R Remarks VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC Ref. No. R8014 R8015 R8016 R8017 R8018 R8019 R8020 R8021 R8022 R8023 R8024 R8031 R8033 R8034 R8035 R8036 R8037 R8038 R8039 R8040 Part No. Part Name & Description AQ00183R AQ00207R AQ00209R AQ00187R AQ00214R AQ00192R AQ00221R AQ00227R AQ00201R AQ00236R AQ00214R AQ00194R AQ00192R AQ00194R AQ00194R AQ00167R AQ00194R AQ00181R AQ00198R AQ00172R RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR RESISTOR SW8011 SW8012 SW8013 SW8014 SW8015 SW8016 FB10591R FB10471R FB10471R FB10471R FB10471R FB10471R SWITCH SWITCH,TACT SWITCH,TACT SWITCH,TACT SWITCH,TACT SWITCH,TACT CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP CHIP 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 560 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 1/16W 150 Remarks 390 3.3K 3.9K 5.6K 820 10K 18K 1.8K 39K 5.6K 1.0K 820 1.0K 1.0K 100 1.0K 330 1.5K 168 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals VDR-M70EG / VDR-M70EB / VDR-M70GC / VDR-M50EG / VDR-M50EB / VDR-M50GC 10 FACTORY SETTING Set the factory setting to “Default at factory” in Table 4-2-1 of 4.2.1. “List of setting items to be reset”. 169 Downloaded From VideoCamera-Manual.com Manuals